From 2cc9cc7337f2823d79cd487d8baa5b735c7ba8a3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 26 Aug 2021 20:47:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH] Remove leading zeros in headers of chapter intro in NT. (#2045) Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2045 Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee Co-committed-by: Larry Sallee --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- en_tn_42-MRK.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- en_tn_43-LUK.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- en_tn_46-ROM.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- en_tn_47-1CO.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- en_tn_48-2CO.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- en_tn_49-GAL.tsv | 12 ++++++------ en_tn_50-EPH.tsv | 12 ++++++------ en_tn_51-PHP.tsv | 8 ++++---- en_tn_52-COL.tsv | 8 ++++---- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 10 +++++----- en_tn_54-2TH.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_55-1TI.tsv | 12 ++++++------ en_tn_56-2TI.tsv | 8 ++++---- en_tn_57-TIT.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_59-HEB.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- en_tn_61-1PE.tsv | 10 +++++----- en_tn_62-2PE.tsv | 6 +++--- en_tn_63-1JN.tsv | 10 +++++----- en_tn_67-REV.tsv | 18 +++++++++--------- 21 files changed, 135 insertions(+), 135 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 90f06d398f..d333043acd 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote MAT front intro sa9c 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Matthew

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Matthew

1. The birth of Jesus Christ and the beginning of his ministry (1:1-4:25)
1. Jesus’ Sermon on the Mount (5:1-7:28)
1. Jesus illustrates the kingdom of God through acts of healing (8:1-9:34)
1. Jesus’ teaching about mission and the kingdom (9:35-10:42)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the gospel of the kingdom of God. The beginning of opposition to Jesus. (11:1-12:50)
1. Jesus’ parables about the kingdom of God (13:1-52)
1. Further opposition to Jesus and misunderstanding of the kingdom of God (13:53-17:57)
1. Jesus’ teaching about life in the kingdom of God (18:1-35)
1. Jesus ministers in Judea (19:1-22:46)
1. Jesus’ teaching about the final judgment and salvation (23:1-25:46)
1. The crucifixion of Jesus, his death and resurrection (26:1-28:19)

### What is the book of Matthew about?

The Gospel of Matthew is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Matthew showed that Jesus was the Messiah, and God would save Israel through him. Matthew often explained that Jesus fulfilled the Old Testament prophecies about the Messiah. This may indicate that he expected most of his first readers to be Jewish. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Matthew,” or “The Gospel according to Matthew.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Matthew wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Matthew?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was the Apostle Matthew.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “kingdom of heaven?”

Matthew spoke of the kingdom of heaven in the same way that other gospel writers spoke of the kingdom of God. The kingdom of heaven represents God ruling over all people and all creation everywhere. Those whom God accepts into his kingdom will be blessed. They will live with God forever.

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Matthew?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions:
* “Bless those who curse you, do good to those who hate you” (5:44)
* “For yours is the kingdom and the power and the glory forever. Amen” (6:13)
* “But this kind of demon does not go out except with prayer and fasting” (17:21)
* “For the Son of Man came to save that which was lost” (18:11)
* “Many are called, but few are chosen” (20:16)
* “Woe to you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for you devour widows’ houses, while you make a show of long prayers. You will therefore receive greater condemnation.” (23:14)

Translators are advised not to include these passages. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these passages, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Matthew’s Gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -MAT 1 intro y7kk 0 # Matthew 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could become king. Most important people had records of their genealogies.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Use of the passive voice

Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 1 intro y7kk 0 # Matthew 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set a quotation from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this for the quoted material in 1:23.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Jews used genealogies to choose the right man to become king. They did this because only a son of a king could become king. Most important people had records of their genealogies.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Use of the passive voice

Matthew uses the passive voice very purposefully in this chapter to indicate that Mary did not have a sexual relationship with anyone. She became pregnant with Jesus because the Holy Spirit performed a miracle. Many languages do not have a passive voice, so translators in those languages must find other ways to present the same truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 1 1 ava1 0 General Information: The author begins with Jesus’ genealogy in order to show that he is a descendant of King David and of Abraham. The genealogy continues through [Matthew 1:17](../01/17.md). MAT 1 1 y31w βίβλος γενέσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The book of the genealogy of Jesus Christ You could translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “This is the list of the ancestors of Jesus Christ” MAT 1 1 vpg1 Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ Δαυεὶδ, υἱοῦ Ἀβραάμ 1 of Jesus Christ, son of David, son of Abraham There were many generations between Jesus, David, and Abraham. Here the word **son** means “descendant.” Alternate translation: “Jesus Christ, a descendant of David, who was a descendant of Abraham” @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ MAT 1 24 nr5e παρέλαβεν τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ 1 he took MAT 1 25 i7p5 figs-euphemism οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτὴν 1 he did not know her This is a euphemism. Alternate translation: “he did not have sexual relations with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 1 25 dlm9 υἱόν 1 a son “a male baby” or “her son.” Make sure it is clear that Joseph is not portrayed as the actual father. MAT 1 25 jtz8 καὶ ἐκάλεσεν τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, Ἰησοῦν 1 And he called his name Jesus “And Joseph named the child Jesus” -MAT 2 intro dz1c 0 # Matthew 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6 and 18, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “His star”

These words probably refer to a star that the learned men believed to be the sign of a new king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Learned men”

English translations use many different words to translate this phrase. These words include “magi” and “wise men.” These men could have been scientists or astrologers. If you can, you should translate this with the general word “learned men.” +MAT 2 intro dz1c 0 # Matthew 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6 and 18, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “His star”

These words probably refer to a star that the learned men believed to be the sign of a new king of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Learned men”

English translations use many different words to translate this phrase. These words include “magi” and “wise men.” These men could have been scientists or astrologers. If you can, you should translate this with the general word “learned men.” MAT 2 1 j9yn 0 General Information: A new part of the story begins here and continues through the end of the chapter. Matthew tells about Herod’s attempt to kill the new King of the Jews. MAT 2 1 k518 Βηθλέεμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 Bethlehem of Judea “the town of Bethlehem in the province of Judea” MAT 2 1 id55 ἐν…ἡμέραις Ἡρῴδου τοῦ βασιλέως 2 in the days of Herod the king “when Herod was king there” @@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ MAT 2 22 h4cq translate-names Ἀρχέλαος 1 Archelaus This is the name of MAT 2 22 zk37 ἐφοβήθη 1 he was afraid “Joseph was afraid” MAT 2 23 dx5i figs-activepassive τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τῶν προφητῶν 1 what had been spoken through the prophets You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what the Lord spoke long ago through the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 2 23 hc8g translate-names Ναζωραῖος κληθήσεται 1 he will be called a Nazarene Here, **he** refers to Jesus. The prophets before the time of Jesus would have referred to him as the Messiah or the Christ. Alternate translation: “people would say that the Christ is a Nazarene” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 3 intro a6h3 0 # Matthew 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in verse 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Bear fruit worthy of repentance”

Fruit is a common picture word in the scriptures. Writers use it to describe the results of either good or bad behavior. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The kingdom of heaven is near”

No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.” +MAT 3 intro a6h3 0 # Matthew 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in verse 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Bear fruit worthy of repentance”

Fruit is a common picture word in the scriptures. Writers use it to describe the results of either good or bad behavior. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The kingdom of heaven is near”

No one knows for sure whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when John spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phrases “is coming near” and “has come near.” MAT 3 1 xp3z 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of the ministry of John the Baptist. In verse 3, Matthew quotes the prophet Isaiah to show that John the Baptist was God’s appointed messenger to prepare for Jesus’ ministry. MAT 3 1 d74m ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days This is many years after Joseph and his family left Egypt and went to Nazareth. This is probably near the time that Jesus begins his ministry. Alternate translation: “some time later” or “some years later” MAT 3 2 w7e9 figs-you μετανοεῖτε 1 Repent This is plural in form. John is speaking to the crowds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ MAT 3 16 jh1v figs-activepassive ἀνεῴχθησαν αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρ MAT 3 16 e3na figs-simile καταβαῖνον ὡσεὶ περιστερὰν 1 coming down like a dove This could mean: (1) Matthew is simply saying that the Spirit was in the form of a **dove**. (2) This is a simile that compares the Spirit coming down upon Jesus gently, the way a **dove** would. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 3 17 m2wk figs-metonymy φωνὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέγουσα 1 a voice from the heavens saying “Jesus heard a voice from heaven saying.” Here, **voice** refers to God speaking. Alternate translation: “God spoke from heaven saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 3 17 myz8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱός μου 1 my Son This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6, 15 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation in verse 10.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “the kingdom of heaven has come near”

No one knows for use whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when Jesus spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phase “is coming near” and “has come near.”

### “If you are the Son of God”

The reader should not understand these words in verses 3 and 6 to mean that Satan did not know whether Jesus was the Son of God. God had already said that Jesus was his Son ([Matthew 3:17](../../mat/03/17.md)), so Satan knew who Jesus was. He also knew that Jesus could make stones become bread and could throw himself off of high places and not be hurt. He was trying to make Jesus do these things and so disobey God and obey Satan. These words can be translated as “Because you are the Son of God” or “You are the Son of God. Show me what you can do.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]]) +MAT 4 intro hgw2 0 # Matthew 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in verses 6, 15 and 16, which are words from the Old Testament.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quotation in verse 10.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “the kingdom of heaven has come near”

No one knows for use whether the “kingdom of heaven” was present or still coming when Jesus spoke these words. English translations often use the phrase “at hand,” but these words can be difficult to translate. Other versions use the phase “is coming near” and “has come near.”

### “If you are the Son of God”

The reader should not understand these words in verses 3 and 6 to mean that Satan did not know whether Jesus was the Son of God. God had already said that Jesus was his Son ([Matthew 3:17](../../mat/03/17.md)), so Satan knew who Jesus was. He also knew that Jesus could make stones become bread and could throw himself off of high places and not be hurt. He was trying to make Jesus do these things and so disobey God and obey Satan. These words can be translated as “Because you are the Son of God” or “You are the Son of God. Show me what you can do.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]]) MAT 4 1 k51m 0 General Information: Here Matthew begins a new part of the story in which Jesus spends 40 days in the wilderness, where Satan tempts him. In verse 4, Jesus rebukes Satan with a quotation from Deuteronomy. MAT 4 1 aq3s figs-activepassive ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνήχθη…ὑπὸ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Jesus was led up by the Spirit You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 4 1 wy4b figs-activepassive πειρασθῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 to be tempted by the devil You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so the devil could tempt Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ MAT 4 24 i296 figs-activepassive δαιμονιζομένους 1 being possesse MAT 4 24 p3nf figs-genericnoun σεληνιαζομένους 1 the epileptic This refers to anyone there who had epilepsy, not to a particular **epileptic**. Alternate translation: “those who sometimes have seizures” or “those who sometimes become unconscious and move uncontrollably” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 4 24 qk4c figs-genericnoun καὶ παραλυτικούς 1 and the paralytic This refers to anyone there who was paralyzed, not to a particular **paralytic**. Alternate translation: “and any who are paralyzed” or “and those who can not walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) MAT 4 25 i9m7 translate-names Δεκαπόλεως 1 the Decapolis This name means “the Ten Towns.” This is the name of a region to the southeast of the Sea of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

Matthew 5:3-10, known as the Beatitudes or Blessings, has been set apart by being set farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word “blessed.” This way of placing the words on the page highlights the poetic form of this teaching.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “His disciples”

It is possible to refer to anyone who followed Jesus as a follower or disciple. Jesus selected twelve of his followers to become his closest disciples, “the twelve disciples.” They would later become known as the apostles. +MAT 5 intro awz8 0 # Matthew 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

Matthew 5:3-10, known as the Beatitudes or Blessings, has been set apart by being set farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text, with each line beginning with the word “blessed.” This way of placing the words on the page highlights the poetic form of this teaching.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “His disciples”

It is possible to refer to anyone who followed Jesus as a follower or disciple. Jesus selected twelve of his followers to become his closest disciples, “the twelve disciples.” They would later become known as the apostles. MAT 5 1 hz26 0 General Information: In verse 3, Jesus begins to describe the characteristics of people who are blessed. MAT 5 1 c5rq 0 Connecting Statement: This is the beginning of a new part of the story in which Jesus begins to teach his disciples. This part continues through the end of chapter 7 and is frequently called the Sermon on the Mount. MAT 5 2 q9mm figs-idiom ἀνοίξας τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 having opened his mouth This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “when Jesus began to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ MAT 5 47 ba6e figs-rquestion τί περισσὸν ποιεῖτε? 1 what do y MAT 5 47 ben5 ἀσπάσησθε 1 you might greet This is a general term for showing a desire for the well-being of the hearer. MAT 5 47 elw9 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ καὶ οἱ ἐθνικοὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν? 1 Do not even the Gentiles do the same thing? This question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Even the Gentiles do the same thing.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 5 48 l6pa guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 6 intro jrj2 0 # Matthew 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Matthew 6 continues Jesus’ extended teaching known as “The Sermon on the Mount.”

You may wish to set apart the prayer in 6:9-11 by placing it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject. +MAT 6 intro jrj2 0 # Matthew 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Matthew 6 continues Jesus’ extended teaching known as “The Sermon on the Mount.”

You may wish to set apart the prayer in 6:9-11 by placing it farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text.

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject. MAT 6 1 zvn1 figs-you 0 General Information: Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. All occurrences of “you” and “your” are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 6 1 at4q 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to teach his disciples in his Sermon on the Mount, which began in [Matthew 5:3](../05/03.md). In this section, Jesus addresses the “acts of righteousness” of alms, prayer, and fasting. MAT 6 1 bgc7 figs-explicit ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι αὐτοῖς 1 before men to be seen by them It is implied that those who see the person will honor him. Alternate translation: “in front of people to be seen by them so they will give you honor for what you have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -485,7 +485,7 @@ MAT 6 33 ep2c figs-metonymy ζητεῖτε…πρῶτον τὴν βασιλε MAT 6 33 ak39 figs-activepassive ταῦτα πάντα προστεθήσεται ὑμῖν 1 all these things will be added to you You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will provide all these things for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 6 34 qm2a οὖν 1 Therefore “Because of all this” MAT 6 34 xdg7 figs-personification ἡ…αὔριον μεριμνήσει ἑαυτῆς 1 tomorrow will be anxious for itself Jesus speaks of **tomorrow** as if it were a person who could worry. Jesus means that a person will have enough to worry about when the next day comes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Matthew 5-7

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

### “By their fruits you will know them”

Fruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]]) +MAT 7 intro bz7e 0 # Matthew 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Jesus spoke about many different subjects in this sermon, so you may wish to help the reader by putting an empty line into the text whenever Jesus changed the subject.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Matthew 5-7

Many people call the words in Matthew 5-7 the Sermon on the Mount. This is one long lesson that Jesus taught. Bibles divide this lesson into three chapters, but this can sometimes confuse the reader. If your translation divides the text into sections, be sure that the reader understands that the whole sermon is one large section.

### “By their fruits you will know them”

Fruit is a common image in the scriptures. It is used to describe the results of either good or bad actions. In this chapter, good fruit is the result of living as God commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]]) MAT 7 1 jav3 figs-you 0 General Information: Jesus is talking to a group of people about what they as individuals should and should not do. The instances of “you” and the commands are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 7 1 f4fe 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to teach his disciples in his Sermon on the Mount, which began in [Matthew 5:3](../05/03.md). MAT 7 1 xk6w figs-explicit μὴ κρίνετε 1 Do not judge It is implied here that **judge** has the strong meaning of “condemn harshly” or “declare guilty.” Alternate translation: “Do not condemn people harshly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ MAT 7 27 k4hi ἦν ἡ πτῶσις αὐτῆς μεγάλη 1 its destructi MAT 7 28 jrh7 writing-endofstory 0 General Information: These verses describe how the people in the crowds reacted to Jesus’ teaching in the Sermon on the Mount. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) MAT 7 28 hu6z καὶ ἐγένετο, ὅτε 1 And it came about that when This phrase shifts the story from Jesus’ teachings to what happened next. Alternate translation: “And when” or “Now after” MAT 7 28 b321 ἐξεπλήσσοντο…ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ 1 were astonished by his teaching It is clear in 7:29 that they were amazed not just at what Jesus taught but also the way he taught it. Alternate translation: “were amazed by the way he taught” -MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter begins a new section.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

Jesus performed miracles to show that he could control things that no other people could control. He also showed that it is proper to worship him because he performed miracles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]]) +MAT 8 intro f33a 0 # Matthew 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter begins a new section.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

Jesus performed miracles to show that he could control things that no other people could control. He also showed that it is proper to worship him because he performed miracles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]]) MAT 8 1 qb1d writing-newevent 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that contains several accounts of Jesus healing people. This theme continues through [Matthew 9:35](../09/35.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MAT 8 1 clf8 καταβάντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρους, ἠκολούθησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοί 1 Now when he had come down from the hill, large crowds followed him “After Jesus came down from the hill, a large crowd followed him.” The crowd may have included both people who had been with him on the mountain and people who had not been with him. MAT 8 2 vas8 ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ MAT 8 34 b2hp ἰδοὺ 1 behold This marks the beginning of another event in MAT 8 34 j6sp figs-metonymy πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word **city** is a metonym for the people of the city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 8 34 xb5x figs-hyperbole πᾶσα ἡ πόλις 1 the whole city The word **whole** is probably an exaggeration to emphasize how very many people came out. Not necessarily every person came out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 8 34 bsf4 τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 their region “their region” -MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 09 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Rhetorical questions

Speakers in this chapter asked questions to which they already knew the answer. They asked the questions to show that they were not happy with the hearers or to teach them or to get them to think. Your language may have another way of doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Proverbs

Proverbs are very short sentences that use words that are easy to remember to tell about something that is generally true. People who understand proverbs usually have to know much about the language and culture of the speaker. When you translate the proverbs in this chapter, you may have to use many more words than the speakers used so that you can add information that the hearers knew but your reader do not know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 9 intro tg41 0 # Matthew 9 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Passive voice

Many sentences in this chapter tell that a person had something happen to him without saying who caused that something to happen. You may have to translate the sentence so that it tells the reader who performed the action. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Rhetorical questions

Speakers in this chapter asked questions to which they already knew the answer. They asked the questions to show that they were not happy with the hearers or to teach them or to get them to think. Your language may have another way of doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

### Proverbs

Proverbs are very short sentences that use words that are easy to remember to tell about something that is generally true. People who understand proverbs usually have to know much about the language and culture of the speaker. When you translate the proverbs in this chapter, you may have to use many more words than the speakers used so that you can add information that the hearers knew but your reader do not know. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) MAT 9 1 nl8w 0 Connecting Statement: Matthew returns to the theme, which he began in [Matthew 8:1](../08/01.md), of Jesus healing people. This begins an account of Jesus healing a paralyzed man. MAT 9 1 cs8l πλοῖον 1 a boat This is probably the same boat as in [Matthew 8:23](../08/23.md). You only need to specify this if needed to avoid confusion. MAT 9 1 lje9 εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν 1 into his own city “to the town where he lived.” This refers to Capernaum. diff --git a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv index 770396508f..6afbb00076 100644 --- a/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_42-MRK.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote MRK front intro r2f2 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Mark

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Mark

1. Introduction (1:1-13)
1. The ministry of Jesus in Galilee
* Early ministry (1:14-3:6)
* Jesus becomes more popular among the people (3:7-5:43)
* Moving away from Galilee and then returning (6:1-8:26)
1. Progress toward Jerusalem, repeated times when Jesus predicts his own death; the disciples misunderstand, and Jesus teaches them how difficult it will be to follow him (8:27-10:52)
1. Last days of ministry and preparation for final conflict in Jerusalem (11:1-13:37)
1. The death of Christ and the empty tomb (14:1-16:8)

### What is the Book of Mark about?

The Gospel of Mark is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Mark wrote much about how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. He did this to encourage his readers who were being persecuted. Mark also explained Jewish customs and some Aramaic words. This may indicate that Mark expected most of his first readers to be Gentiles.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Mark,” or “The Gospel according to Mark.” They may also choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News about Jesus that Mark wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Mark?

The book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the author was Mark. Mark was also known as John Mark. He was a close friend of Peter. Mark may not have witnessed what Jesus said and did. But many scholars think that Mark wrote in his gospel what Peter told him about Jesus.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were Jesus’ teaching methods?

The people regarded Jesus as a rabbi. A rabbi is a teacher of God’s law. Jesus taught in similar ways as other religious teachers in Israel. He had students who followed him wherever he went. These students were called disciples. He often told parables. Parables are stories that teach moral lessons. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/parable]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they have many similar passages. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

The texts are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” It is a reference to Daniel 7:13-14. In this passage there is a person described as a “son of man.” That means the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to the son of man to rule over the nations forever. And all the people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. Therefore, Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Why does Mark frequently use terms indicating short periods of time?

The Gospel of Mark uses the word “immediately” forty-two times. Mark does this to make the events more exciting and vivid. It moves the reader quickly from one event to the next.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Mark?

The following verses are found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to include these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include one or more of these verses, the translators can include them. If they are included, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to Mark’s Gospel.
* “If any man has ears to hear, let him hear.” (7:16)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:44)
* “where their worm never dies and the fire is never quenched” (9:46)
* “And the scripture was fulfilled that says, ‘He was counted with the lawless ones’” (15:28)

The following passage in not found in the earliest manuscripts. Most Bibles include this passage, but modern Bibles put it in brackets ([]) or indicate in some way that this passage may not have been original to Mark’s Gospel. Translators are advised to do something similar as the modern versions of the Bible.
* “Early on the first day of the week, after he arose, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, from whom he had cast out seven demons. She went and told those who were with him, while they were mourning and weeping. They heard that he was alive and that he had been seen by her, but they did not believe. After these things he appeared in a different form to two of them, as they were walking out into the country. They went and told the rest of the disciples, but they did not believe them. Jesus later appeared to the eleven as they were reclining at the table, and he rebuked them for their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they did not believe those who saw him after he rose from the dead. He said to them, ‘Go into all the world, and preach the gospel to the entire creation. He who believes and is baptized will be saved, and he who does not believe will be condemned. These signs will go with those who believe: In my name they will cast out demons. They will speak in new languages. They will pick up snakes with their hands, and if they drink anything deadly, it will not hurt them. They will lay hands on the sick, and they will get well.’ After the Lord had spoken to them, he was taken up into heaven and sat down at the right hand of God. The disciples left and preached everywhere, while the Lord worked with them and confirmed the word by the signs that went with them.” (16:9-20)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “You can make me clean”

Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

### “The kingdom of God is near”

Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.” +MRK 1 intro c6ep 0 # Mark 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:2-3, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “You can make me clean”

Leprosy was a disease of the skin that made a person unclean and unable to properly worship God. Jesus is capable of making people physically “clean” or healthy as well as spiritually “clean” or right with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

### “The kingdom of God is near”

Scholars debate whether the “kingdom of God” was present at this time or is something that is still coming. English translations frequently use the phrase “at hand,” but this can create difficulty for translators. Other versions use the phase “is coming” and “has come near.” MRK 1 1 s8qp 0 General Information: The book of Mark begins with the prophet Isaiah’s foretelling of the coming of John the Baptist, who baptizes Jesus. The author is Mark, also called John Mark, who is the son of one of the several women named Mary mentioned in the four Gospels. He is also the nephew of Barnabas. MRK 1 1 i3bc guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MRK 1 2 gu7i figs-idiom πρὸ προσώπου σου 1 before your face This is an idiom that means “ahead of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ MRK 1 45 bn6r ὥστε 1 so that “so much that” MRK 1 45 l9es figs-explicit ὥστε μηκέτι αὐτὸν δύνασθαι φανερῶς εἰς πόλιν εἰσελθεῖν 1 so that Jesus was able no longer to enter a town openly This was the result of the man spreading the news so much. Here, **openly** is a metaphor for “publicly.” Jesus could not enter the towns because many people would crowd around him. Alternate translation: “that Jesus could no longer enter a town publicly” or “that Jesus could no longer enter the towns in a way that many people would see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MRK 1 45 d5lw ἐρήμοις τόποις 1 desolate places “lonely places” or “places where no one lived” MRK 1 45 z363 figs-hyperbole πάντοθεν 1 from all sides The word **all sides** is a hyperbole used to emphasize how very many places the people came from. Alternate translation: “from all over the region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and Feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MRK 2 intro zhb5 0 # Mark 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Sinners”

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses and instead committed sins like stealing or sexual sins. When Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who believe that they are sinners can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and Feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or were showing God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, like during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

The Jewish leaders used rhetorical questions to show that they were angry because of what Jesus said and did and that they did not believe that he was God’s Son ([Mark 2:7](../../mrk/02/07.md)). Jesus used them to show the Jewish leaders that they were arrogant ([Mark 2:25-26](./25.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 2 1 se22 0 Connecting Statement: After preaching and healing people throughout Galilee, Jesus returns to Capernaum where he heals and forgives the sin of a paralyzed man. MRK 2 1 ir5j figs-activepassive ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν 1 it was heard that he is at home You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people there heard that he was staying at his home” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 2 2 d3iy figs-explicit καὶ συνήχθησαν πολλοὶ 1 And many gathered The people **gathered** to the house where Jesus stayed in Capernaum. Alternate translation: “And many people gathered there” or “And many people came to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ MRK 2 26 y57j τοὺς ἄρτους τῆς Προθέσεως 1 the bread of MRK 2 27 i374 figs-activepassive τὸ Σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο 1 The Sabbath was made for man Jesus makes clear why God established the Sabbath. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God made the Sabbath for mankind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MRK 2 27 u83s figs-gendernotations τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 man “mankind” or “people” or “the needs of people.” This word here refers to both men and women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MRK 2 27 s2yd figs-ellipsis οὐχ ὁ ἄνθρωπος διὰ τὸ Σάββατον 1 not man for the Sabbath The words **was made** are understood from the previous phrase. They can be repeated here. Alternate translation: “man was not made for the Sabbath” or “God did not make man for the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MRK 3 intro x969 0 # Mark 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sabbath

It was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

### Brothers and Sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) +MRK 3 intro x969 0 # Mark 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sabbath

It was against the law of Moses to do work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees believed healing a sick person on the Sabbath was “work,” so they said that Jesus did wrong when he healed a person on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

Thaddaeus is probably the same person as Jude, the son of James.

### Brothers and Sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) MRK 3 1 cp3e 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus heals a man on the Sabbath in the synagogue and shows how he feels about what the Pharisees had done with the Sabbath rules. The Pharisees and Herodians begin to plan to put Jesus to death. MRK 3 1 y5l9 ἄνθρωπος, ἐξηραμμένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα 1 a man having a withered hand “a man with a crippled hand” MRK 3 2 v2yj παρετήρουν αὐτὸν, εἰ τοῖς Σάββασιν θεραπεύσει αὐτόν 1 they were watching him closely, if he will heal him on the Sabbath “some people watched Jesus closely to see if he would heal the man with the withered hand on the Sabbath day” @@ -233,7 +233,7 @@ MRK 3 32 wms6 ζητοῦσίν σε 1 seeking you “asking for you” MRK 3 33 qe8c figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? 1 Who are my mother and my brothers? Jesus uses this question to teach the people. Alternate translation: “I will tell you who are really my mother and brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 3 35 dr45 ὃς…ἂν ποιήσῃ…οὗτος…ἐστίν 1 whoever may do … this is “those who do … they are” MRK 3 35 yr9i figs-metaphor οὗτος ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀδελφὴ καὶ μήτηρ ἐστίν 1 this is my brother, and sister, and mother This is a metaphor that means Jesus’ disciples belong to Jesus’ spiritual family. This is more important than belonging to his physical family. Alternate translation: “that person is like a brother, sister, or mother to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth. +MRK 4 intro f5ua 0 # Mark 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Mark 4:3-10 forms one parable. The parable is explained in 4:14-23.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:12, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Parables

The parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people would easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. He also told the stories so that those who did not want to believe in him would not understand the truth. MRK 4 1 a6pk figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: As Jesus taught from a boat at the seaside, he told them the parable of the soils. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MRK 4 1 i95e τὴν θάλασσαν 1 the sea This is the Sea of Galilee. MRK 4 3 vqh3 ἀκούετε! ἰδοὺ…ὁ σπείρων 1 Listen! Behold, the sower “Pay attention! A farmer” @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ MRK 4 39 ag41 γαλήνη μεγάλη 1 a great calm “a great stillness ove MRK 4 40 h7n3 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 And he said to them “And Jesus said to his disciples” MRK 4 40 w5n4 figs-rquestion τί δειλοί ἐστε? οὔπω ἔχετε πίστιν 1 Why are you afraid? Do you not yet have faith? Jesus asks these questions to make his disciples consider why they are **afraid** when he is with them. These questions can be written as statements. Alternate translation: “You should not be afraid. You need to have more faith.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MRK 4 41 u8e1 figs-rquestion τίς ἄρα οὗτός ἐστιν, ὅτι καὶ ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ ἡ θάλασσα ὑπακούει αὐτῷ? 1 Who then is this, for even the wind and the sea obey him? The disciples ask this question in amazement at what Jesus did. This question can be written as a statement. Alternate translation: “This man is not like ordinary men; even the wind and the sea obey him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MRK 5 intro lh25 0 # Mark 05 General Notes

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Talitha, koum”

The words **Talitha, koum** ([Mark 5:41](../../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +MRK 5 intro lh25 0 # Mark 5 General Notes

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Talitha, koum”

The words **Talitha, koum** ([Mark 5:41](../../mrk/05/41.md)) are from the Aramaic language. Mark writes them the way they sound and then translates them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) MRK 5 1 fix1 0 Connecting Statement: After Jesus calms the great storm, he heals a man who has many demons, but the local people in Gerasa are not glad about his healing, and they beg Jesus to leave. MRK 5 1 gt8a ἦλθον 1 They came The word **They** refers to Jesus and his disciples. MRK 5 1 ahx8 τῆς θαλάσσης 1 the sea This refers to the Sea of Galilee. @@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ MRK 5 42 pt5t translate-numbers ἦν…ἐτῶν δώδεκα 1 she was 12 yea MRK 5 43 i5ja figs-quotations διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἵνα μηδεὶς γνοῖ τοῦτο, καὶ 1 he strictly ordered them that no one should know about this, and You can state this as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “he ordered them strictly, ‘No one should know about this!’ Then” or “he ordered them strictly, ‘Do not tell anyone about what I have done!’ Then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MRK 5 43 ij1k διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς πολλὰ 1 he strictly ordered them “he strongly commanded them” MRK 5 43 n29k figs-quotations καὶ εἶπεν δοθῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν 1 and he told them to give her something to eat You can state this as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “and he told them, ‘Give her something to eat.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MRK 6 intro kl7n 0 # Mark 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Anointed with oil”

In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them. +MRK 6 intro kl7n 0 # Mark 6 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Anointed with oil”

In the ancient Near East, people would try to heal sick people by putting olive oil on them. MRK 6 1 mi7z 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus returns to his hometown, where he is not accepted. MRK 6 1 mjr1 τὴν πατρίδα αὐτοῦ 1 his hometown This refers to the town of Nazareth, where Jesus grew up and where his family lived. This does not mean that he owned land there. MRK 6 2 y4xj τίς ἡ σοφία ἡ δοθεῖσα τούτῳ 1 what is this wisdom that has been given to him? This question, which contains passive construction, can be asked in active form. Alternate translation: “what is this wisdom that he has gained?” @@ -496,7 +496,7 @@ MRK 6 56 a3i3 παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 were begging him This could m MRK 6 56 m366 ἅψωνται 1 they might touch The word **they** refers to the sick. MRK 6 56 wd2u τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 the edge of his garment “the hem of his robe” or “the edge of his clothes” MRK 6 56 ugr3 ὅσοι ἂν 1 as many as “all those who” -MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hand washing

The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Ephphatha”

This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +MRK 7 intro vq1j 0 # Mark 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:6-7, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hand washing

The Pharisees washed many things that were not dirty because they were trying to make God think that they were good. They washed their hands before they ate, even when their hands were not dirty. and even though the law of Moses did not say that they had to do it. Jesus told them that they were wrong and that people make God happy by thinking and doing the right things. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Ephphatha”

This is an Aramaic word. Mark wrote it the way it sounds using Greek letters and then explained what it means. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) MRK 7 1 hu3f 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus rebukes the Pharisees and scribes. MRK 7 1 b9ul συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 are gathering around him “are gathered around Jesus” MRK 7 2 b8qw writing-background 0 General Information: In verses 3 and 4, the author gives background information about the Pharisees’ washing traditions in order to show why the Pharisees were bothered that Jesus’ disciples did not wash their hands before eating. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -580,7 +580,7 @@ MRK 7 36 eb2y figs-ellipsis ὅσον…αὐτοῖς διεστέλλετο, MRK 7 36 zce7 μᾶλλον περισσότερον 1 the more abundantly “the more widely” or “the more” MRK 7 37 iy76 ὑπέρπερισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο 1 they were extremely astonished “they were utterly amazed” or “they were exceedingly astonished” or “they were astonished beyond all measure” MRK 7 37 dh17 figs-metonymy τοὺς κωφοὺς…ἀλάλους 1 the deaf … the mute These refer to people. Alternate translation: “deaf people … mute people” or “people who cannot hear … people who cannot speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 08 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Bread

When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.

Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Adulterous generation”

When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)). +MRK 8 intro ry56 0 # Mark 8 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Bread

When Jesus worked a miracle and provided bread for a large crowd of people, they probably thought about when God miraculously provided food for the people of Israel when they were in the wilderness.

Yeast is the ingredient that causes bread to become larger before it is baked. In this chapter, Jesus uses yeast as a metaphor for things that change the way people think, speak, and act. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Adulterous generation”

When Jesus called the people an “adulterous generation,” he was telling them that they were not faithful to God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Jesus used many rhetorical questions as a way of both teaching the disciples ([Mark 8:17-21](./17.md)) and scolding the people ([Mark 8:12](../../mrk/08/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Mark 8:35-37](./35.md)). MRK 8 1 sgv6 0 Connecting Statement: A great, hungry crowd is with Jesus. He feeds them using only seven loaves and a few fish before Jesus and his disciples get in a boat to go to another place. MRK 8 1 rmd8 writing-newevent ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 In those days This phrase is used to introduce a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) MRK 8 2 h8v8 ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προσμένουσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσιν τι φάγωσιν 1 they are remaining with me already for three days and do not have anything to eat “this is this third day these people have been with me, and they have nothing to eat” @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ MRK 8 38 s5tm guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπ MRK 8 38 xd58 ὅταν ἔλθῃ 1 when he may come “when he comes back” MRK 8 38 vl69 ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ Πατρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 in the glory of his Father When Jesus returns he will have the same **glory** as his Father. MRK 8 38 vqk3 μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν ἁγίων 1 with the holy angels “accompanied by the holy angels” -MRK 9 intro n92j 0 # Mark 09 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hyperbole

Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” ([Mark 9:43](../../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so they would know that they should stay away from anything that caused them to sin, even if it was something they loved or thought they needed.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah and Moses

Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” ([Mark 9:35](../../mrk/09/35.md)). +MRK 9 intro n92j 0 # Mark 9 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “transfigured”

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Mark says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Hyperbole

Jesus said things that he did not expect his followers to understand literally. When he said, “If your hand causes you to stumble, cut it off” ([Mark 9:43](../../mrk/09/43.md)), he was exaggerating so they would know that they should stay away from anything that caused them to sin, even if it was something they loved or thought they needed.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Elijah and Moses

Elijah and Moses suddenly appear to Jesus, James, John, and Peter, and then they disappear. All four of them saw Elijah and Moses, and because Elijah and Moses spoke with Jesus, the reader should understand that Elijah and Moses appeared physically.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([Mark 9:31](../../mrk/09/31.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “If anyone wants to be first, he must be last of all and servant of all” ([Mark 9:35](../../mrk/09/35.md)). MRK 9 1 mt8p 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus has just been talking to the people and his disciples about following him. Six days later, Jesus goes with three of his disciples up a mountain where his appearance temporarily changes to what he will look like one day in the kingdom of God. MRK 9 1 q4b6 ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς 1 he was saying to them “Jesus said to his disciples” MRK 9 1 yjf6 figs-metonymy τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐληλυθυῖαν ἐν δυνάμει 1 the kingdom of God come with power The kingdom of God coming represents God showing himself as king. Alternate translation: “God show himself with great power as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) diff --git a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv index 2bcfa32ff7..b321b94ff1 100644 --- a/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv +++ b/en_tn_43-LUK.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote LUK front intro uk55 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of Luke


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Luke

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. Prologue

* The birth of John the Baptist (1:5-80)

* The birth and youth of Jesus (2:1-51)

* The ministry of John the Baptist (3:1-20)

* The baptism, genealogy, and temptation of Jesus (3:21-4:13)
3. The teaching and healing ministry of Jesus in Galilee (4:14-9:50)
4. Jesus teaches along his journey to Jerusalem

* Judgment by God, and people’s judgments about Jesus (9:51-13:21)

* Who will be part of the kingdom of God (13:22-17:10)

* Responding to Jesus by welcoming or rejecting him (17:11-19:27)
5. Jesus in Jerusalem

* Jesus’ entry into Jerusalem (19:28-44)

* Jesus teaches in the temple: conflict over his identity and authority (19:45-21:38)

* Jesus’ death, burial, and resurrection (22:1-24:53)

### What is the Gospel of Luke about?

The Gospel of Luke is one of four books in the New Testament that describe the life and teachings of Jesus Christ. These books are called “gospels,” which means “good news.” Their authors wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. Luke wrote his gospel for a person named Theophilus and dedicated it to him. Luke wrote an accurate description of the life and teachings of Jesus so that Theophilus would be certain that what he had been taught about Jesus was true. However, Luke expected that what he wrote would encourage all followers of Jesus.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of Luke” or “The Gospel according to Luke.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “The Good News about Jesus that Luke Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Book of Luke?

This book does not give the name of its author. However, the same person who wrote this book also wrote the Book of Acts, which is also dedicated to Theophilus. In parts of the book of Acts, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person traveling with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have recognized Luke as the author of both the Gospel of Luke and the book of Acts.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. Luke himself probably did not witness what Jesus said and did. But he tells Theophilus in his dedication that he talked to many people who did.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### The kingdom of God

“The kingdom of God” is a major concept in the Gospel of Luke. It is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### Why does Luke write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

Luke wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### What are the roles of women in the Gospel of Luke?

Luke described women in a very positive way in his gospel. For example, he often showed women being more faithful to God than most men. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What are the Synoptic Gospels?

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke are called the Synoptic Gospels because they tell the story of many of the same events. The word “synoptic” means to “see together.”

Passages are considered “parallel” when they are the same or almost the same among two or three gospels. When translating parallel passages, translators should use the same wording and make them as similar as possible.

### Why does Jesus refer to himself as the “Son of Man”?

In the gospels, Jesus calls himself the “Son of Man.” This is a reference to [Daniel 7:13-14](../dan/07/13.md). In that passage, there is a person who is described as like a “son of man.” That means that the person was someone who looked like a human being. God gave authority to this “son of man” to rule over the nations forever. All people will worship him forever.

Jews of Jesus’ time did not use “Son of Man” as a title for anyone. But Jesus used it for himself to help them understand who he truly was. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]])

Translating the title “Son of Man” can be difficult in many languages. Readers may misunderstand a literal translation. Translators can consider alternatives, such as “The Human One.” It may also be helpful to include a footnote to explain the title.

### Major issues in the text of the Book of Luke

ULT follows the readings of the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. However, there may already be older versions of the Bible in the translators’ regions that follow the readings of other manuscripts. In the most significant cases, the General Notes to the chapters in which these differences occur will discuss them and recommend approaches. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5-25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26-38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39-56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57-80)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46-55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68-79.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “He will be called John”

Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name. +LUK 1 intro f1b5 0 # Luke 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Dedication to Theophilus (1:1-4)
2. The angel Gabriel announces to Zechariah that his wife Elizabeth is going to bear a son, John the Baptist (1:5-25)
3. The angel Gabriel announces to Mary that she is going to become the mother of Jesus (1:26-38)
4. Mary goes to visit Elizabeth (1:39-56)
5. John the Baptist is born (1:57-80)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in Mary’s song about becoming the mother of Jesus in 1:46-55 and Zechariah’s song about the birth of his son John the Baptist in 1:68-79.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “He will be called John”

Most people in the ancient Near East would give a child the same name as someone in their families. People were surprised that Elizabeth and Zechariah named their son John because there was no one else in their family with that name. LUK 1 1 qhd9 figs-activepassive περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημένων ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων 1 concerning the things that have been fulfilled among us If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “about those things that have happened among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 1 1 hyp6 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 among us Luke dedicates this book to a man named Theophilus. It is no longer known exactly who he was. But since Luke says in [1:4](../01/04.md) that he wants Theophilus to know that the things he has been taught are reliable, it appears that he was a follower of Jesus. So here the word **us** would include him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) LUK 1 2 hud2 figs-metonymy οἱ…αὐτόπται…γενόμενοι 1 who … were eyewitnesses The term **eyewitness** describes someone who saw something happen personally, “with their own eyes.” The term describes such a person figuratively by reference to something associated with sight, the eye. Alternate translation: “who … saw these things personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ LUK 1 80 eh9j figs-explicit ἦν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις 1 he was in th LUK 1 80 qu12 ἕως ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 until the day of his public appearance The term **until** does not indicate a stopping point. John continued to live out in the wilderness even after he started preaching publicly. In your translation, be sure that this is clear to your readers. Alternate translation: “through the time when he began to preach in public” LUK 1 80 ie4l figs-idiom ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ 1 the day of his public appearance Here, Luke uses the term **day** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “the time when he began to preach in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 1 80 l102 figs-personification πρὸς τὸν Ἰσραήλ 1 to Israel Luke is referring to all of the Israelites figuratively as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus is born in the city of Bethlehem (2:1-20)
2. Joseph and Mary dedicate Jesus, and Simeon and Anna speak about him (2:21-40)
3. Jesus goes to Jerusalem with his parents for Passover (2:41-52)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in the song of the angels about Jesus’ birth in 2:14 and in Simeon’s song about Jesus in 2:29-32.

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “his father and mother”

In [2:33](../02/33.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “his father and mother.” ULT follows that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts read “Joseph and his mother.” That reading indicates that Joseph was not the biological father of Jesus, since Mary conceived him as a virgin. However, Joseph was the adoptive father of Jesus, and so the reading “his father and mother” is not incorrect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 2 intro dw6t 0 # Luke 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus is born in the city of Bethlehem (2:1-20)
2. Joseph and Mary dedicate Jesus, and Simeon and Anna speak about him (2:21-40)
3. Jesus goes to Jerusalem with his parents for Passover (2:41-52)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in the song of the angels about Jesus’ birth in 2:14 and in Simeon’s song about Jesus in 2:29-32.

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “his father and mother”

In [2:33](../02/33.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “his father and mother.” ULT follows that reading. Some other ancient manuscripts read “Joseph and his mother.” That reading indicates that Joseph was not the biological father of Jesus, since Mary conceived him as a virgin. However, Joseph was the adoptive father of Jesus, and so the reading “his father and mother” is not incorrect. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading in ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 2 1 c887 writing-newevent ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days This time reference introduces a new event. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 2 1 l103 figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 in those days Here, Luke uses the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular period of time. Alternate translation: “around that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 2 1 e9m5 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that Luke uses this phrase to show that this is the beginning of an account. If your language has a way of showing the start of an account, you may use that in your translation. If not, you may choose not to represent this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -479,7 +479,7 @@ LUK 2 51 zl2q figs-activepassive ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος αὐτοῖ LUK 2 51 ceu3 figs-metaphor διετήρει πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτῆς 1 kept all these things in her heart As in [2:19](../02/19.md), the **heart** here figuratively represents the thoughts and emotions. Alternate translation: “carefully remembered all these things” or “reflected carefully on what all these things meant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) LUK 2 52 gb25 figs-abstractnouns Ἰησοῦς προέκοπτεν τῇ σοφίᾳ, καὶ ἡλικίᾳ 1 Jesus was increasing in wisdom and stature If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate the ideas behind the abstract nouns **wisdom** and **stature** with adjectives. These two terms refer to mental and physical growth. Alternate translation: “Jesus steadily became wiser and stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 2 52 y5qk figs-abstractnouns χάριτι παρὰ Θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις 1 in favor with God and people If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **favor** with verbs. The phrase **in favor with God and people** refers to spiritual and social growth. Alternate translation: “God blessed him more and more, and people admired him more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. John the Baptist begins preaching and baptizing (3:1-22)
2. The list of Jesus’ ancestors (3:23-38)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4-6, which Luke is quoting from the Old Testament about John the Baptist.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Justice

John’s instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in Luke 3:12-15 are things that a person who wanted to live rightly would find reasonable and willingly do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and Luke [3:12-15](./12.md))

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king’s authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy that Luke quotes in 3:4-6 from Isaiah 40:3-5 is an extended metaphor that describes the ministry of John the Baptist. See the individual notes to 3:4-6 for recommendations about how to translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Herod locked up John in prison”

This statement could cause confusion because Luke says that John was imprisoned, and then he implies that John was still able to baptize Jesus. But Luke makes this statement in anticipation of Herod’s imprisonment of John. It describes something that was still in the future at the time of the other events in the narrative. See the first note to 3:19 for a further explanation. +LUK 3 intro tkg5 0 # Luke 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. John the Baptist begins preaching and baptizing (3:1-22)
2. The list of Jesus’ ancestors (3:23-38)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 3:4-6, which Luke is quoting from the Old Testament about John the Baptist.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Justice

John’s instructions to the soldiers and tax collectors in Luke 3:12-15 are things that a person who wanted to live rightly would find reasonable and willingly do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and Luke [3:12-15](./12.md))

### Genealogy

A genealogy is a list that records a person’s ancestors or descendants. Such lists were very important in determining who had the right be king, because the king’s authority was usually passed down or inherited from his father. It was also common for other important people to have a recorded genealogy.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Prophecy often involves the use of metaphors to express its meaning. Spiritual discernment is needed for proper interpretation of the prophecy. The prophecy that Luke quotes in 3:4-6 from Isaiah 40:3-5 is an extended metaphor that describes the ministry of John the Baptist. See the individual notes to 3:4-6 for recommendations about how to translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Herod locked up John in prison”

This statement could cause confusion because Luke says that John was imprisoned, and then he implies that John was still able to baptize Jesus. But Luke makes this statement in anticipation of Herod’s imprisonment of John. It describes something that was still in the future at the time of the other events in the narrative. See the first note to 3:19 for a further explanation. LUK 3 1 l167 writing-newevent ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ τῆς ἡγεμονίας Τιβερίου Καίσαρος 1 in the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar This verse and the beginning of the next one are an extended time reference that introduces a new event. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Everything that the angels and inspired people had said about John and Jesus began to come true during the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 3 1 l168 translate-ordinal ἐν ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ 1 in the fifteenth year If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “in year 15” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) LUK 3 1 l169 writing-participants Τιβερίου Καίσαρος 1 Tiberius Caesar As in [2:1](../02/01.md), **Caesar** is the title of the emperor of the Roman Empire. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “King Tiberius, who ruled the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -587,7 +587,7 @@ LUK 3 36 xit8 translate-names τοῦ Καϊνὰμ, τοῦ Ἀρφαξὰδ, LUK 3 37 qev8 translate-names τοῦ Μαθουσαλὰ, τοῦ Ἑνὼχ, τοῦ Ἰάρετ, τοῦ Μαλελεὴλ, τοῦ Καϊνὰμ 1 of Methuselah, of Enoch, of Jared, of Mahalaleel, of Cainan This is a continuation of the list of Jesus’ ancestors that began in Luke 3:23. Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 38 ni8x translate-names τοῦ Ἐνὼς, τοῦ Σὴθ, τοῦ Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of Enos, of Seth, of Adam, of God This is a continuation of the list of Jesus’ ancestors that began in Luke 3:23. Use the same format as you used in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 3 38 ck3f τοῦ Ἀδὰμ, τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of Adam, of God Alternate translation: “the son of Adam, whom God created” or “the son of Adam, who was, in a sense, the son of God” -LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The devil tempts Jesus in the wilderness (4:1-13)
2. Jesus teaches in the synagogue in Nazareth (4:14-30)
3. Jesus teaches, heals, and drives out demons in Capernaum (4:31-44)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10-11 and 4:18-19, which is quoted from the Old Testamentt.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Jesus was tempted by the devil”

While it is true that the devil actually believed that he could persuade Jesus to disobey God and obey him instead, it is important not to imply in your translation that Jesus would ever really have wanted to obey the devil. +LUK 4 intro r3vy 0 # Luke 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. The devil tempts Jesus in the wilderness (4:1-13)
2. Jesus teaches in the synagogue in Nazareth (4:14-30)
3. Jesus teaches, heals, and drives out demons in Capernaum (4:31-44)

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. ULT does this with the poetry in 4:10-11 and 4:18-19, which is quoted from the Old Testamentt.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Jesus was tempted by the devil”

While it is true that the devil actually believed that he could persuade Jesus to disobey God and obey him instead, it is important not to imply in your translation that Jesus would ever really have wanted to obey the devil. LUK 4 1 n1xx writing-newevent Ἰησοῦς δὲ 1 Then Jesus Luke uses this expression to return to the story after providing background information about Jesus’ ancestors. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could include a phrase that would provide continuity with the previous episode in the story. Alternate translation: “After John had baptized Jesus, then Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 4 1 l201 translate-names τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 the Jordan **Jordan** is the name of a river. Alternate translation: “the Jordan River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 4 1 v18k figs-activepassive ἤγετο ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 was led by the Spirit You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Spirit led him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -734,7 +734,7 @@ LUK 4 43 l244 figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελίσασθαί…τὴν Βασ LUK 4 43 sjy1 figs-metonymy ταῖς ἑτέραις πόλεσιν 1 to other cities Jesus actually means the people who live in these cities. He is describing them figuratively by reference to something associated with them, the cities where they live. Alternate translation: “to the people in many other cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 4 43 b45z figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἀπεστάλην 1 for this I was sent If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “this is the reason why God sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) LUK 4 44 s5mb figs-explicit τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 in Judea Since Jesus is in Galilee in this part of the Gospel of Luke, the term **Judea** here probably refers to the entire region where the Jews lived at that time. Alternate translation: “where the Jews lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 5 intro axr7 0 # Luke 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus calls Peter and his fellow fishermen to be his disciples (5:1-11)
2. Jesus travels to various towns teaching and healing (5:12-26)
3. Jesus calls Levi to be his disciple (5:27-32)
4. Jesus teaches about fasting (5:33-39)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “You will catch men”

Peter, James, and John were fishermen. When Jesus told them that they would catch men, he was using a metaphor to tell them he wanted them to help people believe the good news about him. See the last note to 5:10. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses. But when Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who understand that they are sinners who have disobeyed God can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or in order to show God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, such as during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Healthy and sick people

To correct the Pharisees, Jesus speaks of healthy people who do not need a doctor. This does not mean that there are people who do not need Jesus. Rather, Jesus was explaining why he spent time with people whom the Pharisees considered to be “sinners.” See the notes to 5:31-32. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Implicit information

In several parts of this chapter, as in other places in the book, Luke does not explain information that his original readers would already have understood. Modern readers might not know some of those things, so they might have trouble understanding all that Luke is communicating. The alternate translations in these notes and the readings in UST often illustrate how that information can be presented so that modern readers will be able to understand these passages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Past events

Parts of this chapter are sequences of events that have already happened. In a given passage, Luke sometimes writes as if the events have already happened while other events are still in progress (even though they are complete at the time he writes). This can cause difficulty in translation by creating an illogical order of events. It may be necessary to make these consistent by writing as if all the events have already happened. +LUK 5 intro axr7 0 # Luke 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus calls Peter and his fellow fishermen to be his disciples (5:1-11)
2. Jesus travels to various towns teaching and healing (5:12-26)
3. Jesus calls Levi to be his disciple (5:27-32)
4. Jesus teaches about fasting (5:33-39)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “You will catch men”

Peter, James, and John were fishermen. When Jesus told them that they would catch men, he was using a metaphor to tell them he wanted them to help people believe the good news about him. See the last note to 5:10. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Sinners

When the people of Jesus’ time spoke of “sinners,” they were talking about people who did not obey the law of Moses. But when Jesus said that he came to call “sinners,” he meant that only people who understand that they are sinners who have disobeyed God can be his followers. This is true even if they are not what most people think of as “sinners.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fasting and feasting

People would fast, or not eat food for a long time, when they were sad or in order to show God that they were sorry for their sins. When they were happy, such as during weddings, they would have feasts, or meals where they would eat much food. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fast]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Healthy and sick people

To correct the Pharisees, Jesus speaks of healthy people who do not need a doctor. This does not mean that there are people who do not need Jesus. Rather, Jesus was explaining why he spent time with people whom the Pharisees considered to be “sinners.” See the notes to 5:31-32. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Implicit information

In several parts of this chapter, as in other places in the book, Luke does not explain information that his original readers would already have understood. Modern readers might not know some of those things, so they might have trouble understanding all that Luke is communicating. The alternate translations in these notes and the readings in UST often illustrate how that information can be presented so that modern readers will be able to understand these passages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Past events

Parts of this chapter are sequences of events that have already happened. In a given passage, Luke sometimes writes as if the events have already happened while other events are still in progress (even though they are complete at the time he writes). This can cause difficulty in translation by creating an illogical order of events. It may be necessary to make these consistent by writing as if all the events have already happened. LUK 5 1 zc8q writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 5 1 wsf8 figs-metonymy ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Here, Luke uses **word** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus said by using words. Alternate translation: “listening to the the message Jesus was bringing from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 5 1 p6im translate-names τὴν λίμνην Γεννησαρέτ 1 the lake of Gennesaret **Lake of Gennesaret** is another name for the body of water also known as the Sea of Galilee. Galilee was on the west side of this lake, and the land of Gennesaret was on the east side, so it was called by both names. Some English versions translate this as the proper name of the body of water. Alternate translation: “Lake Gennesaret” or “the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -855,7 +855,7 @@ LUK 5 37 l279 figs-activepassive οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀπολοῦνται 1 the LUK 5 38 ijm3 ἀσκοὺς καινοὺς 1 new wineskins See how you translated the term **wineskins** in [5:37](../05/37.md). Alternate translation: “fresh leather bags” LUK 5 39 l280 figs-ellipsis οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 No one, after drinking the old, wants the new Jesus is leaving out some of the words. You can supply them in your translation if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No one who is used to drinking old wine wants to try new wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) LUK 5 39 pvn9 figs-metaphor οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν θέλει νέον 1 No one, after drinking the old, wants the new Jesus is figuratively contrasting the old teaching of the religious leaders with his own new teaching. The point is that people who are used to the old teaching are not receptive to the new things that he is bringing. Jesus does not explain the metaphor, so you do not need to explain it in your translation unless you think your readers will not understand it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -LUK 6 intro vv2y 0 # Luke 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about the Sabbath (6:1-11)
2. Jesus chooses twelve apostles (6:12-16)
3. Jesus teaches about being his disciple (6:17-49)

The long teaching in Luke 6:20-49 begins with blessings and woes that are similar to the beginning of the long teaching in Matthew 5-7. That part of Matthew has traditionally been called the “Sermon on the Mount.” The teaching here in Luke has many other similarities with the one in Matthew’s gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Eating the grain”

When the disciples plucked and ate the grain in a field they were walking through on the Sabbath (Luke 6:1), the Pharisees said that they were breaking the law of Moses. The Pharisees said this because they thought that the disciples were doing work by picking the grain, and so they were disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees did not think the disciples were stealing. That is because the law of Moses told farmers to allow travelers to pluck and eat small amounts of grain from plants in fields that they traveled through or near. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

The man whom Luke calls Judas the son of James is probably the same man whom Matthew and Mark call Thaddaeus. However, you do not need to explain that in your translation or give both names. You can translate Luke’s list as he wrote it, and allow Bible teachers to explain the reason for the difference. +LUK 6 intro vv2y 0 # Luke 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches about the Sabbath (6:1-11)
2. Jesus chooses twelve apostles (6:12-16)
3. Jesus teaches about being his disciple (6:17-49)

The long teaching in Luke 6:20-49 begins with blessings and woes that are similar to the beginning of the long teaching in Matthew 5-7. That part of Matthew has traditionally been called the “Sermon on the Mount.” The teaching here in Luke has many other similarities with the one in Matthew’s gospel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Eating the grain”

When the disciples plucked and ate the grain in a field they were walking through on the Sabbath (Luke 6:1), the Pharisees said that they were breaking the law of Moses. The Pharisees said this because they thought that the disciples were doing work by picking the grain, and so they were disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. The Pharisees did not think the disciples were stealing. That is because the law of Moses told farmers to allow travelers to pluck and eat small amounts of grain from plants in fields that they traveled through or near. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The twelve disciples

The following are the lists of the twelve disciples:

In Matthew:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James son of Zebedee, John son of Zebedee, Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot and Judas Iscariot.

In Mark:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James the son of Zebedee and John the son of Zebedee (to whom he gave the name Boanerges, that is, sons of thunder), Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Thaddaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot.

In Luke:

Simon (Peter), Andrew, James, John, Philip, Bartholomew, Matthew, Thomas, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon (who was called the Zealot), Judas the son of James, and Judas Iscariot.

The man whom Luke calls Judas the son of James is probably the same man whom Matthew and Mark call Thaddaeus. However, you do not need to explain that in your translation or give both names. You can translate Luke’s list as he wrote it, and allow Bible teachers to explain the reason for the difference. LUK 6 1 c4sa writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 6 1 x5zk translate-unknown σπορίμων 1 the grainfields These were large sections of land where people had scattered wheat seed in order to grow more wheat. Wheat is a kind of **grain** plant, and **grain** is a type of large grass that has edible seeds. If your readers would not be familiar with this type of plant, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “the areas where people were growing plants with edible seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) LUK 6 1 rl46 translate-unknown στάχυας 1 heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the **grain** plant. They hold the mature, edible seeds. Alternate translation: “parts that held the seeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1041,7 +1041,7 @@ LUK 6 49 yu5r translate-unknown ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν χωρὶς θεμελ LUK 6 49 bs8c ᾗ προσέρρηξεν ὁ ποταμός 1 against which the torrent of water flowed In this context, the word **flowed** indicates violent impact. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The floodwaters crashed against it” LUK 6 49 q98t συνέπεσεν 1 collapsed Alternate translation: “it fell down” or “it came apart” LUK 6 49 jm86 ἐγένετο τὸ ῥῆγμα τῆς οἰκίας ἐκείνης μέγα 1 the ruin of that house was great Your language may require you to say what was responsible for the **ruin** of the **house**. Alternate translation: “the floodwaters completely demolished that house” -LUK 7 intro u8gj 0 # Luke 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus does miracles in Capernaum and Nain (7:1-17)
2. Jesus responds to messengers from John the Baptist and then teaches about John (7:18-35)
3. A woman anoints Jesus with perfume (7:36-50)

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. ULT does this with the quoted material in 7:27.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Centurion

A centurion was a Roman military commander. The centurion who asked Jesus to heal his slave (Luke 7:2) was doing some unusual things. A Roman soldier, especially an officer, would almost never go to a Jew for help, and most wealthy people did not love or care for their slaves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/centurion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### John’s Baptism

This chapter refers again to the baptism of John (7:29). John baptized people who wanted to show that they knew they were sinners and that they were sorry for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### “Sinners”

In 7:34, Jesus describes how the Pharisees said he was a friend of “sinners.” That was the name that the Pharisees used for people whom they thought were disobeying the law of Moses. In reality, it was the Pharisees who were sinful, since they rejected Jesus, the Savior whom God had sent. This situation can be understood as irony. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Washing feet

The feet of the people in the ancient Near East were very dirty because they wore sandals and the roads and trails were dusty in the dry season and muddy in the wet season. Only slaves washed other people’s feet. The woman who washed Jesus’ feet was showing him great honor. +LUK 7 intro u8gj 0 # Luke 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus does miracles in Capernaum and Nain (7:1-17)
2. Jesus responds to messengers from John the Baptist and then teaches about John (7:18-35)
3. A woman anoints Jesus with perfume (7:36-50)

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. ULT does this with the quoted material in 7:27.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Centurion

A centurion was a Roman military commander. The centurion who asked Jesus to heal his slave (Luke 7:2) was doing some unusual things. A Roman soldier, especially an officer, would almost never go to a Jew for help, and most wealthy people did not love or care for their slaves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/centurion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### John’s Baptism

This chapter refers again to the baptism of John (7:29). John baptized people who wanted to show that they knew they were sinners and that they were sorry for their sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### “Sinners”

In 7:34, Jesus describes how the Pharisees said he was a friend of “sinners.” That was the name that the Pharisees used for people whom they thought were disobeying the law of Moses. In reality, it was the Pharisees who were sinful, since they rejected Jesus, the Savior whom God had sent. This situation can be understood as irony. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Washing feet

The feet of the people in the ancient Near East were very dirty because they wore sandals and the roads and trails were dusty in the dry season and muddy in the wet season. Only slaves washed other people’s feet. The woman who washed Jesus’ feet was showing him great honor. LUK 7 1 l343 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα αὐτοῦ 1 his words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to describe the things that Jesus taught by using words. Alternate translation: “his teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) LUK 7 1 zi6w figs-idiom εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς τοῦ λαοῦ 1 in the hearing of the people This phrase is an idiom. Alternate translation: “as the people were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 7 1 l2zp writing-newevent εἰσῆλθεν εἰς Καφαρναούμ 1 he entered into Capernaum This reference to a location, **Capernaum**, introduces a new event in the story. Alternate translation: “he went into the city of Capernaum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1215,7 +1215,7 @@ LUK 7 49 ie4z figs-rquestion τίς οὗτός ἐστιν ὃς καὶ ἁμ LUK 7 50 lje8 figs-abstractnouns ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “you have trusted in God, and God has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) LUK 7 50 l398 figs-personification ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέν σε 1 Your faith has saved you Jesus speaks figuratively of the woman’s **faith** as if it had actively **saved** her. He means that it provided the conditions for her to receive salvation from God. Alternate translation: “you have trusted in God, and God has saved you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) LUK 7 50 sp2u figs-explicit πορεύου εἰς εἰρήνην 1 Go in peace This was a way of saying goodbye while giving a blessing at the same time. It also reassured the woman, despite the disapproval of the religious leaders. Alternate translation: “May God give you peace as you go” or “You may go now, and do not worry about your sins anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -LUK 8 intro ba3i 0 # Luke 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches the crowds with parables (8:1-21)
2. Jesus calms a storm on the Sea of Galilee (8:22-25)
3. Jesus drives out many demons from a man (8:26-39)
4. Jesus heals a woman and restores a dead girl to life (8:40-55)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

In this chapter, Jesus makes a storm stop by speaking to it, he makes a dead girl alive by speaking to her, and he makes evil spirits leave a man by speaking to them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parables

Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. But people who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message (Luke 8:4-15).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people use the terms “brother” and “sister” for those who have the same parents as they do. They think of them as some of the most important people in their lives. Some people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter, Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “having spent all her living on doctors”

In [8:43](../08/43.md), some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “having spent all her living on doctors,” but other manuscripts do not. ULT includes the phrase in its text, but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to whether it was an original part of the book of Luke. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the phrase if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +LUK 8 intro ba3i 0 # Luke 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus teaches the crowds with parables (8:1-21)
2. Jesus calms a storm on the Sea of Galilee (8:22-25)
3. Jesus drives out many demons from a man (8:26-39)
4. Jesus heals a woman and restores a dead girl to life (8:40-55)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

In this chapter, Jesus makes a storm stop by speaking to it, he makes a dead girl alive by speaking to her, and he makes evil spirits leave a man by speaking to them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Parables

Parables were short stories that Jesus told so that people who wanted to believe in him could easily understand the lesson he was trying to teach them. But people who did not want to believe in him would not be able to understand the message (Luke 8:4-15).

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people use the terms “brother” and “sister” for those who have the same parents as they do. They think of them as some of the most important people in their lives. Some people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter, Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “having spent all her living on doctors”

In [8:43](../08/43.md), some ancient manuscripts of the Bible have the phrase “having spent all her living on doctors,” but other manuscripts do not. ULT includes the phrase in its text, but it mentions in a footnote that scholars are divided as to whether it was an original part of the book of Luke. If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to include the phrase if it does, but leave it out if it does not include it. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) LUK 8 1 i6mi writing-newevent καὶ ἐγένετο 1 And it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) LUK 8 1 l399 figs-idiom κατὰ πόλιν καὶ κώμην 1 through city and village This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “around to different cities and villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) LUK 8 1 l401 figs-abstractnouns τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God See how you decided to translate this phrase in [4:43](../04/43.md). If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule.” Alternate translation: “how God would rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1417,7 +1417,7 @@ LUK 8 54 e7zt writing-pronouns αὐτὸς…κρατήσας τῆς χειρ LUK 8 54 l469 figs-imperative ἔγειρε 1 arise This was not a command that the girl was capable of obeying. Instead, this was a command that directly caused her to be raised from the dead. Alternate translation: “your life is restored, so get up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) LUK 8 55 k6w2 figs-explicit ἐπέστρεψεν τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτῆς 1 her spirit returned The people of this time considered life to be the result of the spirit coming into a person. You could express this in the way that would be most meaningful in your culture. Alternate translation: “she started breathing again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) LUK 8 56 c6mp μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν 1 to tell no one If it would be clearer in your language, you could make the verb negative and the subject positive. Alternate translation: “not to tell anyone” -LUK 9 intro uc1r 0 # Luke 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus sends his 12 apostles to teach and heal (9:1-9)
2. Jesus miraculously feeds 5,000 people (9:10-17)
3. Jesus speaks with his disciples about who he is (9:18-27)
4. The glory of Jesus is revealed on a mountaintop (9:28-36)
5. Jesus drives a demon out of a boy (9:37-43)
6. Jesus speaks about being his disciple (9:44-50)
7. Jesus begins to travel to Jerusalem (9:51-62)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

God had promised the Jews that the prophet Elijah would return before the Messiah came. So some people who saw Jesus do miracles thought Jesus was Elijah (9:9, 9:19). He was not. However, Elijah did come to earth to speak with Jesus (9:30). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Luke says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever would save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will save it” (9:24).

### “Receiving”

This word appears several times in this chapter and means different things. When Jesus says, “If someone receives a little child like this in my name, he also is receiving me, and if someone receives me, he is also receiving the one who sent me” (9:48), he is speaking of people serving the child. When Luke says, “the people there did not receive him” (9:53), he means that the people did not believe in or accept Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) +LUK 9 intro uc1r 0 # Luke 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus sends his 12 apostles to teach and heal (9:1-9)
2. Jesus miraculously feeds 5,000 people (9:10-17)
3. Jesus speaks with his disciples about who he is (9:18-27)
4. The glory of Jesus is revealed on a mountaintop (9:28-36)
5. Jesus drives a demon out of a boy (9:37-43)
6. Jesus speaks about being his disciple (9:44-50)
7. Jesus begins to travel to Jerusalem (9:51-62)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elijah

God had promised the Jews that the prophet Elijah would return before the Messiah came. So some people who saw Jesus do miracles thought Jesus was Elijah (9:9, 9:19). He was not. However, Elijah did come to earth to speak with Jesus (9:30). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/elijah]])

### Glory

Scripture often speaks of God’s glory as a great, brilliant light. When people see this light, they are afraid. Luke says in this chapter that Jesus’ clothing shone with this glorious light so that his followers could see that Jesus truly was God’s Son. At the same time, God told them that Jesus was his Son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fear]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a statement that describes two things that seem as if they cannot both be true at the same time, but which actually are both true. Jesus speaks a paradox in this chapter: “Whoever would save his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for my sake will save it” (9:24).

### “Receiving”

This word appears several times in this chapter and means different things. When Jesus says, “If someone receives a little child like this in my name, he also is receiving me, and if someone receives me, he is also receiving the one who sent me” (9:48), he is speaking of people serving the child. When Luke says, “the people there did not receive him” (9:53), he means that the people did not believe in or accept Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) LUK 9 1 l470 figs-nominaladj συνκαλεσάμενος…τοὺς δώδεκα 1 when he had called the Twelve together See how you translated this in [8:1](../08/01.md). You may have decided to translate the nominal adjective **the Twelve** with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “when he had called together his 12 apostles” or “when he had called together the 12 men whom he had appointed to be apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) LUK 9 1 l471 translate-names τοὺς δώδεκα 1 the Twelve You may have decided instead in [8:1](../08/01.md) to translate this as a title, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns. If so, you can do the same thing here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) LUK 9 1 zqq6 figs-doublet δύναμιν καὶ ἐξουσίαν 1 power and authority **Power** and **authority** mean similar things. Luke uses them together to show that Jesus gave his 12 disciples both the ability and the right to heal people. If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this phrase with a combination of words that includes both of these ideas. Alternate translation: “the right to use power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index 564a076163..3495efca5c 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote JHN front intro t6za 0 # Introduction to the Gospel of John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Gospel of John

1. Introduction about who Jesus is (1:1-18)
1. Jesus is baptized, and he chooses twelve disciples (1:19-51)
1. Jesus preaches, teaches, and heals people (2-11)
1. The seven days before Jesus’ death (12-19)
- Mary anoints the feet of Jesus (12:1-11)
- Jesus rides a donkey into Jerusalem (12:12-19)
- Some Greek men want to see Jesus (12:20-36)
- The Jewish leaders reject Jesus (12:37-50)
- Jesus teaches his disciples (13-17)
- Jesus is arrested and undergoes trial (18:1-19:15)
- Jesus is crucified and buried (19:16-42)
1. Jesus rises from the dead (20:1-29)
1. John says why he wrote his gospel (20:30-31)
1. Jesus meets with the disciples (21)

### What is the Gospel of John about?

The Gospel of John is one of four books in the New Testament that describe some of the life of Jesus Christ. The authors of the gospels wrote about different aspects of who Jesus was and what he did. John said that he wrote his gospel “so that people might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of the living God” (20:31).

John’s Gospel is very different from the other three Gospels. John does not include some of the teachings and events that the other writers included in their gospels. Also, John wrote about some teachings and events that are not in the other gospels.

John wrote much about the signs Jesus did to prove that what Jesus said about himself was true. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sign]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Gospel of John” or “The Gospel According to John.” Or they may choose a title that may be clearer, such as, “The Good News About Jesus That John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the Gospel of John?

This book does not give the name of the author. However, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that the Apostle John was the author.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Why does John write so much about the final week of Jesus’ life?

John wrote much about Jesus’ final week. He wanted his readers to think deeply about Jesus’ final week and his death on the cross. He wanted people to understand that Jesus willingly died on the cross so that God could forgive them for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What do the words “remain,” “reside,” and “abide” mean in the Gospel of John?

John often used the words “remain,” “reside”, and “abide” as metaphors. John spoke of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if Jesus’ word “remained” in the believer. Also, John spoke of someone being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ and in God. The Father is said to “remain” in the Son, and the Son is said to “remain” in the Father. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. The Holy Spirit is also said to “remain” in the believers.

Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. For example, Jesus intended to express the idea of the Christian being spiritually together with him when he said, “He who eats my flesh and drinks my blood remains in me, and I in him” (John 6:56). The UST uses the idea of “will be joined to me, and I will be joined to him.” But translators may have to find other ways of expressing the idea.

In the passage, “If my words remain in you” (John 15:7), the UST expresses this idea as, “If you live by my message.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Gospel of John?

The following verses found in older versions of the Bible but are not included in most modern versions. Translators are advised not to translate these verses. However, if in the translators’ region, there are older versions of the Bible that include these verses, the translators can include them. If they are translated, they should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to John’s Gospel.
* “waiting for the moving of the water. For an angel of the Lord occasionally went down into the pool and stirred the water and whoever went first after the stirring of the water, was made well from the disease they had.” (5:3-4)
* “going through the midst of them, and so passed by” (8:59)

The following passage is included in most older and modern versions of the Bible. But it is not in the earliest copies of the Bible. Translators are advised to translate this passage. It should be put inside of square brackets ([]) to indicate that it may not have been original to John’s Gospel.
* The story of the adulterous woman (7:53-8:11)

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -JHN 1 intro k29b 0 # John 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:23, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Word”

John uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus ([John 1:1, 14](./01.md)). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### “Children of God”

When people believes in Jesus, they go from being “children of wrath” to “children of God.” They are adopted into the “family of God.”They are adopted into the “family of God.” This is an important image that will be unfolded in the New Testament. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of the Word to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “In the beginning”

Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 1:51](../../jhn/01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 1 intro k29b 0 # John 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:23, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Word”

John uses the phrase “the Word” to refer to Jesus ([John 1:1, 14](./01.md)). John is saying that God’s most important message to all people is actually Jesus, a person with a physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### “Children of God”

When people believes in Jesus, they go from being “children of wrath” to “children of God.” They are adopted into the “family of God.”They are adopted into the “family of God.” This is an important image that will be unfolded in the New Testament. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

John uses the metaphors of light and darkness and of the Word to tell the reader that he will be writing more about good and evil and about what God wants to tell people through Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “In the beginning”

Some languages and cultures speak of the world as if it has always existed, as if it had no beginning. But “very long ago” is different from “in the beginning,” and you need to be sure that your translation communicates correctly.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 1:51](../../jhn/01/51.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 1 1 er9g ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 In the beginning This refers to the very earliest time before God created the heavens and the earth. JHN 1 1 z59q ὁ λόγος 1 the Word This refers to Jesus. Translate as “the Word” if possible. If “Word” is feminine in your language, it could be translated as “the one who is called the Word.” JHN 1 3 gm5g figs-activepassive πάντα δι’ αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο 1 All things were made through him You can translate this with an active verb. Alternate translation: “God made all things through him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ JHN 1 47 ys8d figs-litotes ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν 1 in whom is JHN 1 49 l666 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 1 50 p3ma figs-rquestion ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις 1 Because I said to you … do you believe? This remark appears in the form of a question to provide emphasis. Alternate translation: “You believe because I said, ‘I saw you underneath the fig tree’!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 1 51 ga44 ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν 1 Truly, truly Translate this the way your language emphasizes that what follows is important and true. -JHN 2 intro jav2 0 # John 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wine

The Jews drank wine at many meals and especially when they were celebrating special events. They did not believe that it was a sin to drink wine.

### Driving out the money changers

Jesus drove the money changers out of the temple to show that he had authority over the temple and over all of Israel.

### “He knew what was in man”

Jesus knew what other people were thinking only because he was and is the Son of Man and the Son of God.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “His disciples remembered”

John used this phrase to stop telling the main history and to tell about something that happened much later. It was right after he scolded the pigeon sellers ([John 2:16](../../jhn/02/16.md)) that the Jewish authorities spoke to him. It was after Jesus became alive again that his disciples remembered what the prophet had written long before and that Jesus was talking about the temple of his body ([John 2:17](../../jhn/02/17.md) and [John 2:22](../../jhn/02/22.md)). +JHN 2 intro jav2 0 # John 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wine

The Jews drank wine at many meals and especially when they were celebrating special events. They did not believe that it was a sin to drink wine.

### Driving out the money changers

Jesus drove the money changers out of the temple to show that he had authority over the temple and over all of Israel.

### “He knew what was in man”

Jesus knew what other people were thinking only because he was and is the Son of Man and the Son of God.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “His disciples remembered”

John used this phrase to stop telling the main history and to tell about something that happened much later. It was right after he scolded the pigeon sellers ([John 2:16](../../jhn/02/16.md)) that the Jewish authorities spoke to him. It was after Jesus became alive again that his disciples remembered what the prophet had written long before and that Jesus was talking about the temple of his body ([John 2:17](../../jhn/02/17.md) and [John 2:22](../../jhn/02/22.md)). JHN 2 1 rl16 writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus and his disciples are invited to a wedding. These verse give background information about the setting of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 2 1 vw9e τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ 1 Three days later Most interpreters read this as on the third day after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel to follow him. The first day occurs in John 1:35 and the second in John 1:43. JHN 2 2 xm3r figs-activepassive ἐκλήθη…ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν γάμον 1 Jesus and his disciples were invited to the wedding You can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Someone invited Jesus and his disciples to the wedding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ JHN 2 23 kvn6 ὡς δὲ ἦν ἐν τοῖς Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 Now JHN 2 23 w3qv figs-metonymy ἐπίστευσαν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 believed in his name Here, **name** is a metonym that represents the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “believed in him” or “trusted in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 2 23 u65n τὰ σημεῖα ἃ ἐποίει 1 the signs that he did Miracles can also be called “signs” because they are used as evidence that God is the all-powerful one who has complete authority over the universe. JHN 2 25 et23 figs-gendernotations περὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου…γὰρ ἐγίνωσκεν τί ἦν ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ 1 about man, for he knew what was in man Here the word **man** represents people in general. Alternate translation: “about people, for he knew what was in people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -JHN 3 intro i7a7 0 # John 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 3:13](../../jhn/03/13.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 3 intro i7a7 0 # John 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 3:13](../../jhn/03/13.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 3 1 yl6f 0 General Information: Nicodemus comes to see Jesus. JHN 3 1 s9p9 writing-participants δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a new part of the story and to introduce Nicodemus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) JHN 3 2 skq8 οἴδαμεν 1 we know Here, **we** is exclusive, referring only to Nicodemus and the other members of the Jewish council. @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ JHN 3 35 hmk4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ…Υἱόν 1 Father … JHN 3 35 ha4e figs-idiom δέδωκεν ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ 1 given … into his hand This means to be put in his power or control. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 3 36 u1ks ὁ πιστεύων 1 He who believes “A person who believes” or “Anyone who believes” JHN 3 36 zy7u ἡ ὀργὴ τοῦ Θεοῦ μένει ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 the wrath of God stays on him The abstract noun “wrath” can be translated with the verb “punish.” Alternate translation: “God will continue to punish him” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -JHN 4 intro j1hv 0 # John 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

John 4:4-38 forms one story centered on the teaching of Jesus as the “living water” who gives eternal life to all who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “It was necessary for him to pass through Samaria”

Jews avoided traveling through the region of Samaria because the Samaritans were descendants of ungodly people. So Jesus had to do what most Jews did not want to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/kingdomofisrael]])

### “The hour is coming”

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. “The hour” in which true worshipers will worship in spirit and truth is longer than sixty minutes.

### The proper place of worship

Long before Jesus lived, the Samaritan people had broken the law of Moses by setting up a false temple in their land ([John 4:20](../../jhn/04/20.md)). Jesus explained to the woman that it was no longer important where people worshiped ([John 4:21-24](./21.md)).

### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to get the food they have planted so they can bring it to their houses and eat it. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about Jesus so those people can be part of God’s kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### “The Samaritan woman”

John probably told this story to show the difference between the Samaritan woman, who believed, and the Jews, who did not believe and later killed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “In spirit and truth”

The people who truly know who God is and enjoy worshiping him and love him for who he is are the ones who truly please him. Where they worship is not important. +JHN 4 intro j1hv 0 # John 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

John 4:4-38 forms one story centered on the teaching of Jesus as the “living water” who gives eternal life to all who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “It was necessary for him to pass through Samaria”

Jews avoided traveling through the region of Samaria because the Samaritans were descendants of ungodly people. So Jesus had to do what most Jews did not want to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/kingdomofisrael]])

### “The hour is coming”

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. “The hour” in which true worshipers will worship in spirit and truth is longer than sixty minutes.

### The proper place of worship

Long before Jesus lived, the Samaritan people had broken the law of Moses by setting up a false temple in their land ([John 4:20](../../jhn/04/20.md)). Jesus explained to the woman that it was no longer important where people worshiped ([John 4:21-24](./21.md)).

### Harvest

Harvest is when people go out to get the food they have planted so they can bring it to their houses and eat it. Jesus used this as a metaphor to teach his followers that they need to go and tell other people about Jesus so those people can be part of God’s kingdom. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### “The Samaritan woman”

John probably told this story to show the difference between the Samaritan woman, who believed, and the Jews, who did not believe and later killed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “In spirit and truth”

The people who truly know who God is and enjoy worshiping him and love him for who he is are the ones who truly please him. Where they worship is not important. JHN 4 1 jum6 writing-background 0 General Information: John 4:1-6 gives the background to the next event, Jesus’ conversation with a Samaritan woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 4 1 ci4n 0 Connecting Statement: A long sentence begins here. JHN 4 1 b1vc ὡς οὖν ἔγνω ὁ Ἰησοῦς ὅτι ἤκουσαν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι, ὅτι Ἰησοῦς πλείονας μαθητὰς ποιεῖ καὶ βαπτίζει ἢ Ἰωάννης 1 Now when Jesus knew that the Pharisees had heard that he was making and baptizing more disciples than John “Now Jesus was making and baptizing more disciples than John. When he knew that the Pharisees had heard that he was doing this.” @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ JHN 4 50 uwa3 figs-metonymy ἐπίστευσεν…τῷ λόγῳ 1 believed t JHN 4 51 a5gw ἤδη 1 While This word is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. As the official was going home, his servants were coming to meet him on the road. JHN 4 53 jhg4 καὶ ἐπίστευσεν αὐτὸς καὶ ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ ὅλη 1 So he himself and his whole household believed The reflexive pronoun **himself** is used here to emphasize the word **he**. If you have a way of doing this in your language, you may consider using it. JHN 4 54 k5x6 σημεῖον 1 sign Miracles can also be called “signs” because they are used as indicators or evidence that God is the all-powerful one who has complete authority over the universe. -JHN 5 intro qe17 0 # John 05 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Healing water

Many of the Jews believed that God would heal people who got into some of the pools in Jerusalem when the waters were “stirred up.”

### Testimony

Testimony is what one person says about another person. What a person says about himself is not as important as what other people say about that person. Jesus told the Jews that God had told them who Jesus was, so he did not need to tell them who he was. This was because God had told the writers of the Old Testament what his Messiah would do, and Jesus had done everything they had written that he would do.

### The resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment

God will make some people alive again and because he gives them his grace, they will live with him forever. But he will make some people alive again and because he will treat them justly, they will live apart from him forever.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The Son, the Son of God, and the Son of Man

Jesus refers to himself in this chapter as the “Son” ([John 5:19](../../jhn/05/19.md)), the “Son of God” ([John 5:25](../../jhn/05/25.md)), and the “Son of Man” ([John 5:27](../../jhn/05/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 5 intro qe17 0 # John 5 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Healing water

Many of the Jews believed that God would heal people who got into some of the pools in Jerusalem when the waters were “stirred up.”

### Testimony

Testimony is what one person says about another person. What a person says about himself is not as important as what other people say about that person. Jesus told the Jews that God had told them who Jesus was, so he did not need to tell them who he was. This was because God had told the writers of the Old Testament what his Messiah would do, and Jesus had done everything they had written that he would do.

### The resurrection of life and the resurrection of judgment

God will make some people alive again and because he gives them his grace, they will live with him forever. But he will make some people alive again and because he will treat them justly, they will live apart from him forever.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The Son, the Son of God, and the Son of Man

Jesus refers to himself in this chapter as the “Son” ([John 5:19](../../jhn/05/19.md)), the “Son of God” ([John 5:25](../../jhn/05/25.md)), and the “Son of Man” ([John 5:27](../../jhn/05/27.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 5 1 urn9 writing-background 0 General Information: This is the next event in the story, in which Jesus goes up to Jerusalem and heals a man. These verses give background information about the setting of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 5 1 ea65 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After this This refers to after Jesus healed the official’s son. See how you translated this in [John 3:22](../03/22.md). JHN 5 1 b1pz ἦν ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 there was a Jewish festival “the Jews were celebrating a festival” @@ -337,7 +337,7 @@ JHN 5 45 kk5q figs-metonymy ἔστιν ὁ κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μω JHN 5 45 pf98 ἠλπίκατε 1 your hope “your confidence” or “your trust” JHN 5 47 b8dd figs-rquestion εἰ…τοῖς ἐκείνου γράμμασιν οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν πιστεύσετε 1 If you do not believe his writings, how are you going to believe my words? This remark appears in the form of a question to provide emphasis. Alternate translation: “You do not believe his writings, so you will never believe my words!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 5 47 x7h9 τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασιν 1 my words “what I say” -JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food and so they thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, and so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted them to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “Unless you eat the flesh of the Son of Man and drink his blood, you will not have life in yourselves,” he knew that before he died he would tell his followers to do this by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand what the metaphor referred to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Parenthetical Ideas

Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some context to better understand the story. These explanation are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. The information is placed inside parentheses.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 6:26](../06/26.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 6 intro xe4t 0 # John 6 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### King

The king of any nation was the richest and most powerful person in that nation. The people wanted Jesus to be their king because he gave them food and so they thought he would make the Jews into the richest and most powerful nation in the world. They did not understand that Jesus came to die so God could forgive his people’s sins and that the world would persecute his people.

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Bread

Bread was the most common and important food in Jesus’ day, and so the word “bread” was their general word for “food.” It is often difficult to translate the word “bread” into the languages of people who do not eat bread because the general word for food in some languages refers to food that did not exist in Jesus’ culture. Jesus used the word “bread” to refer to himself. He wanted them to understand that they need him so they can have eternal life. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])

### Eating the flesh and drinking the blood

When Jesus said, “Unless you eat the flesh of the Son of Man and drink his blood, you will not have life in yourselves,” he knew that before he died he would tell his followers to do this by eating bread and drinking wine. In the event this chapter describes, he expected that his hearers would understand that he was using a metaphor but would not understand what the metaphor referred to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blood]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Parenthetical Ideas

Several times in this passage, John explains something or gives the reader some context to better understand the story. These explanation are intended to give the reader some additional knowledge without interrupting the flow of the narrative. The information is placed inside parentheses.

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 6:26](../06/26.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 6 1 qhj7 writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus has traveled from Jerusalem to Galilee. A crowd has followed him up a mountainside. These verses tell the setting of this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 1 el4l μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things The phrase **these things** refers to the events in [John 5:1-46](../05/01.md) and introduces the event that follows. JHN 6 1 z345 figs-explicit ἀπῆλθεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus went away It is implied in the text that Jesus traveled by boat and took his disciples with him. Alternate translation: “Jesus traveled by boat with his disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -452,7 +452,7 @@ JHN 6 67 bg2f figs-ellipsis τοῖς δώδεκα 1 the twelve This is an ellip JHN 6 68 g9l4 figs-rquestion Κύριε, πρὸς τίνα ἀπελευσόμεθα 1 Lord, to whom shall we go? Simon Peter gives this remark in the form of a question to emphasize that he desires to follow only Jesus. Alternate translation: “Lord, we could never follow anyone but you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 6 70 z9yc writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 71 is not part of the main story line as John comments on what Jesus said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 70 m9ys figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξάμην, καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν 1 Did not I choose you, the twelve, and one of you is a devil? Jesus gives this remark in the form of a question to draw attention to the fact that one of the disciples will betray him. Alternate translation: “I chose you all myself, yet one of you is a servant of Satan!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 7 intro l712 0 # John 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This whole chapter concerns the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed this to be true while others rejected it. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 53 to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate verses 7:53-8:11.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My time has not yet come”

This phrase and “his hour had not yet come” are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events unfolding in his life.

### “Living water”

This is an important image used in the New Testament. It is a metaphor. Because this metaphor is given in a desert environment, it probably emphasizes that Jesus is able to give life sustaining nourishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prophecy

Jesus gives a prophecy about his life without an explicit statement in John [John 7:33-34](./33.md).

### Irony

Nicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires him to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about them. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Did not believe in him”

Jesus’ brothers did not believe Jesus was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### “The Jews”

This term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically in reference to the opposition of the Jewish leaders who were trying to kill him ([John 7:1](../../jhn/07/01.md)). It is also used in reference to the people of Judea in general who had a positive opinion of Jesus ([John 7:13](../../jhn/07/13.md)). The translator may wish to use the terms “Jewish leaders” and “Jewish people” or “Jews (leaders)” and “Jews (in general).” +JHN 7 intro l712 0 # John 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This whole chapter concerns the concept of believing Jesus to be the Messiah. Some people believed this to be true while others rejected it. Some were willing to recognize his power and even the possibility that he was a prophet, but most were unwilling to believe that he was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 53 to explain to the reader why they have chosen or chosen not to translate verses 7:53-8:11.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My time has not yet come”

This phrase and “his hour had not yet come” are used in this chapter to indicate that Jesus is in control of the events unfolding in his life.

### “Living water”

This is an important image used in the New Testament. It is a metaphor. Because this metaphor is given in a desert environment, it probably emphasizes that Jesus is able to give life sustaining nourishment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prophecy

Jesus gives a prophecy about his life without an explicit statement in John [John 7:33-34](./33.md).

### Irony

Nicodemus explains to the other Pharisees that the Law requires him to hear directly from a person before making a judgment about them. The Pharisees in turn made a judgment about Jesus without speaking to Jesus.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Did not believe in him”

Jesus’ brothers did not believe Jesus was the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### “The Jews”

This term is used in two different ways in this passage. It is used specifically in reference to the opposition of the Jewish leaders who were trying to kill him ([John 7:1](../../jhn/07/01.md)). It is also used in reference to the people of Judea in general who had a positive opinion of Jesus ([John 7:13](../../jhn/07/13.md)). The translator may wish to use the terms “Jewish leaders” and “Jewish people” or “Jews (leaders)” and “Jews (in general).” JHN 7 1 gg4v writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus is in Galilee speaking to his brothers. These verses tell about when this event occurred. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 7 1 b99m μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things These words tell the reader that the writer will begin talking about a new event. “After he finished speaking with the disciples” ([John 6:66-71](../06/66.md)) or “Some time later” JHN 7 1 k5yv περιεπάτει 1 traveled The reader should understand that Jesus probably walked rather than riding an animal or in a vehicle. @@ -550,7 +550,7 @@ JHN 7 52 pt91 figs-rquestion καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ε JHN 7 52 k6pg figs-ellipsis ἐραύνησον καὶ ἴδε 1 Search and see This is an ellipsis. You may wish to include the information that does not appear. Alternate translation: “Search carefully and read what is written in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 7 52 jm59 προφήτης ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας οὐκ ἐγείρεται 1 no prophet comes from Galilee This probably refers to the belief that Jesus was born in Galilee. JHN 7 53 s5fi translate-textvariants 0 General Information: The best early texts do not have 7:53–8:11. The ULT has set them apart in square brackets ([ ]) to show that John probably did not include them in his original text. Translators are encouraged to translate them, to set them apart with square brackets, and to include a footnote like the one written on [John 7:53](../07/53.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -JHN 8 intro e667 0 # John 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 1 to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate verses 8:1-11.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### A light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. Here it is all Gentiles (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### I AM

John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, three times in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).

### The Scribes and Pharisees’ trap

The Scribes and Pharisees wanted to trick Jesus. They wanted him to say either that they should keep the law of Moses by killing a woman whom they had found committing adultery or that they should disobey the law of Moses and forgive her sin. Jesus knew that they were trying to trick him and that they did not really want to keep the law of Moses. He knew this because the law said that both the woman and the man should die, but they did not bring the man to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adultery]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 8:28](../../jhn/08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 8 intro e667 0 # John 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Translators may wish to include a note at verse 1 to explain to the reader why they have chosen to translate or to not translate verses 8:1-11.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### A light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. Here it is all Gentiles (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### I AM

John records Jesus as saying these words four times in this book, three times in this chapter. They stand alone as a complete sentence, and they literally translate the Hebrew word for “I AM,” by which Yahweh identified himself to Moses. For these reasons, many people believe that when Jesus said these words he was claiming to be Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]]).

### The Scribes and Pharisees’ trap

The Scribes and Pharisees wanted to trick Jesus. They wanted him to say either that they should keep the law of Moses by killing a woman whom they had found committing adultery or that they should disobey the law of Moses and forgive her sin. Jesus knew that they were trying to trick him and that they did not really want to keep the law of Moses. He knew this because the law said that both the woman and the man should die, but they did not bring the man to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adultery]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 8:28](../../jhn/08/28.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 8 1 mkz2 0 General Information: While some texts have 7:53–8:11, the best and earliest texts do not include them. JHN 8 12 m4ma writing-newevent 0 General Information: Jesus is speaking to a crowd near the treasury in the temple after either the events of [John 7:1-52](../07/01.md) or the events of [John 7:53-8:11](../07/53.md). The author does not mark the beginning of this new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 8 12 k5ib figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου 1 I am the light of the world Here the **light** is a metaphor for the revelation that comes from God. Alternate translation: “I am the one who gives light to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -656,7 +656,7 @@ JHN 8 57 r1ek figs-rquestion πεντήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις, JHN 8 58 rnw4 ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν 1 Truly, truly See how you translated this in [John 1:51](../01/51.md). JHN 8 58 k4tp ἐγὼ εἰμί 1 I AM This could mean: (1) Jesus is identifying himself as Yahweh, who identified himself to Moses as “I AM.” (2) Jesus is saying, “before Abraham existed, I existed.” JHN 8 59 bxs5 figs-explicit ἦραν οὖν λίθους, ἵνα βάλωσιν ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 Then they picked up stones to throw at him The Jewish leaders are outraged at what Jesus has said. Here it is implied that they wanted to kill him because he had made himself equal to God. Alternate translation: “Then they picked up stones to kill him because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 9 intro hq31 0 # John 09 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Who sinned?”

Many of the Jews of Jesus’ time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he or his parents or someone in his family had sinned. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### “He does not keep the Sabbath”

The Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by making mud. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Seeing and being blind

Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they see that Jesus is able to heal blind people but they still do not believe that God sent him ([John 9:39-40](./39.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 9:35](../../jhn/09/35.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 9 intro hq31 0 # John 9 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Who sinned?”

Many of the Jews of Jesus’ time believed that if a person was blind or deaf or crippled, it was because he or his parents or someone in his family had sinned. This was not the teaching of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### “He does not keep the Sabbath”

The Pharisees thought that Jesus was working, and so breaking the Sabbath, by making mud. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Seeing and being blind

Jesus calls the Pharisees blind because they see that Jesus is able to heal blind people but they still do not believe that God sent him ([John 9:39-40](./39.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Son of Man”

Jesus refers to himself as the “Son of Man” in this chapter ([John 9:35](../../jhn/09/35.md)). Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking about someone else. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofman]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 9 1 fa5a 0 General Information: As Jesus and his disciples are walking along, they come across a blind man. JHN 9 1 un4h writing-newevent καὶ 1 Now This word shows that the author is about to describe a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 9 1 z5sx figs-synecdoche παράγων 1 as Jesus passed by Here, **Jesus** is a synecdoche for Jesus and the disciples. Alternate translation: “as Jesus and his disciples passed by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) diff --git a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv index 8267177b9b..70f25511f4 100644 --- a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote ROM front intro gtn1 0 # Introduction to Romans

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Romans

1. Introduction (1:1-15)
1. Righteousness by faith in Jesus Christ (1:16-17)
1. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18-3:20)
1. Righteousness through Jesus Christ by faith in him (3:21-4:25)
1. The fruits of the Spirit (5:1-11)
1. Adam and Christ compared (5:12-21)
1. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1-8:39)
1. God’s plan for Israel (9:1-11:36)
1. Practical advice for living as Christians (12:1-15:13)
1. Conclusion and greetings (15:14-16:27)

### Who wrote the Book of Romans?

The Apostle Paul wrote the Book of Romans. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.

### What is the Book of Romans about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26).

In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1-11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12-16),

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?

In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).

### How should theological terms in Romans be translated?

Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6).

The “key terms” dictionary can help translators understand many of these terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

Terms such as those given above are difficult to explain. It is often hard or impossible for translators to find equivalent terms in their own languages. It can help to know that word equivalents of these terms are not necessary. Instead, translators can develop short expressions to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”

Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.

### What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?

The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”

In 11:1-9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?

The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.

These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.

Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that reprents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]])

### How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Romans?

For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.
* “he [God] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”
* “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”

The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Romans.
* “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24).

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ROM 1 intro hn5n 0 # Romans 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a “salutation.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The gospel

This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” ([Romans 1:2](../../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.

### Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul’s work among the Roman Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God

This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “God gave them over”

Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Difficult phrases and concepts

This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: “obedience of faith,” “whom I serve in my spirit,” “from faith to faith” and “exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man.” +ROM 1 intro hn5n 0 # Romans 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a “salutation.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The gospel

This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” ([Romans 1:2](../../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.

### Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul’s work among the Roman Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God

This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “God gave them over”

Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Difficult phrases and concepts

This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: “obedience of faith,” “whom I serve in my spirit,” “from faith to faith” and “exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man.” ROM 1 1 x3em figs-explicit Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. You may also need to tell in this same verse who the people are to whom Paul wrote the letter ([Romans 1:7](../01/07.md)). Alternate translation: “I, Paul, wrote this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 1 1 v5b9 figs-activepassive κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ 1 called to be an apostle and set apart for the gospel of God You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God called me to be an apostle and chose me to tell people about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 1 1 sg88 κλητὸς 1 called This means that God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ ROM 1 32 ytu6 figs-explicit ὅτι οἱ τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντ ROM 1 32 z12q ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν 1 are deserving of death “deserve to die” ROM 1 32 ama2 αὐτὰ 1 these things “these kinds of evil things” ROM 1 32 iqg1 figs-explicit τοῖς πράσσουσιν 1 who do them Here the verb **do** refers to continuing to do things that are evil. Alternate translation: “who keep on doing evil things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 2 intro dse2 0 # Romans 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter shifts its audience from Roman Christians to those who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### “Therefore you are without excuse”

This phrase looks back at Chapter 1. In some ways, it actually concludes what Chapter 1 teaches. This phrase explains why everyone in the world must worship the true God.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Doers of the Law”

Those who try to obey the law will not be justified by trying to obey it. Those who are justified by believing in Jesus show that their faith is real by obeying God’s commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Hypothetical Situation

In context, “he will give eternal life” in verse 7 is a hypothetical statement. If a person could live a perfect life, they would earn eternal life as a reward. But only Jesus was able to live a perfect life.

Paul gives another hypothetical situation in verses 17-29. Here he explains that even those who earnestly try to obey the law of Moses are guilty of violating the law. In English, this is about those who follow the “letter” of the law but cannot follow the “spirit” or general principles of the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You who judge”

At times, You can translate this in a simpler way. But it is translated in this relatively awkward way because when Paul refers to “people who judge” he is also saying that everyone judges. It is possible to translate this as “those who judge (and everyone judges).” +ROM 2 intro dse2 0 # Romans 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter shifts its audience from Roman Christians to those who “judge” other people and do not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### “Therefore you are without excuse”

This phrase looks back at Chapter 1. In some ways, it actually concludes what Chapter 1 teaches. This phrase explains why everyone in the world must worship the true God.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Doers of the Law”

Those who try to obey the law will not be justified by trying to obey it. Those who are justified by believing in Jesus show that their faith is real by obeying God’s commands. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Hypothetical Situation

In context, “he will give eternal life” in verse 7 is a hypothetical statement. If a person could live a perfect life, they would earn eternal life as a reward. But only Jesus was able to live a perfect life.

Paul gives another hypothetical situation in verses 17-29. Here he explains that even those who earnestly try to obey the law of Moses are guilty of violating the law. In English, this is about those who follow the “letter” of the law but cannot follow the “spirit” or general principles of the law. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You who judge”

At times, You can translate this in a simpler way. But it is translated in this relatively awkward way because when Paul refers to “people who judge” he is also saying that everyone judges. It is possible to translate this as “those who judge (and everyone judges).” ROM 2 1 y6ts 0 Connecting Statement: Paul has affirmed all men are sinners and continues to remind them that all people are wicked. ROM 2 1 d7pj figs-explicit διὸ ἀναπολόγητος εἶ 1 Therefore you are without excuse The word **therefore** marks a new section of the letter. It also makes a concluding statement based on what Paul has said in [Romans 1:1-32](../01/01.md). Alternate translation: “Since God will punish those who continually sin, he will certainly not excuse your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 2 1 x3mi figs-apostrophe εἶ 1 you are Paul is writing here as if he were addressing a Jewish person who is arguing with him. Paul is doing this to teach his audience that God will punish everyone who continually sins, whether Jew or Gentile. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ ROM 2 29 v149 ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ 1 inwardly This refers to the values an ROM 2 29 dk8q figs-metonymy καρδίας 1 of the heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for the inner person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ROM 2 29 dd3p figs-synecdoche ἐν Πνεύματι, οὐ γράμματι 1 in the Spirit, not in the letter Here, **letter** is a synecdoche that refers to written Scripture. Alternate translation: “through the work of the Holy Spirit, not because you know the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ROM 2 29 qa6b ἐν Πνεύματι 1 in the Spirit This refers to the internal, spiritual part of a person that “God’s Spirit” changes. -ROM 3 intro y2kb 0 # Romans 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

Chapter 3 answers the question, “What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God”

Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### The purpose of the law of Moses

Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God’s law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]]) +ROM 3 intro y2kb 0 # Romans 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 4 and 10-18 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

Chapter 3 answers the question, “What advantage does being a Jew have over being a Gentile?” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “For all have sinned and come short of the glory of God”

Because God is holy, anyone with him in heaven must be perfect. Any sin at all will condemn a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### The purpose of the law of Moses

Obeying the law cannot make a person right with God. Obeying God’s law is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul frequently uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]]) ROM 3 1 v788 0 Connecting Statement: Paul proclaims the advantage that Jews have because God gave them his law. ROM 3 1 gcd6 figs-explicit τί οὖν τὸ περισσὸν τοῦ Ἰουδαίου, ἢ τίς ἡ ὠφέλια τῆς περιτομῆς 1 Then what advantage does the Jew have? And what is the benefit of circumcision? Paul presents ideas that people might have after they hear what he wrote in chapter 2. He does this in order to respond to them in verse 2. Alternate translation: “Some people might say, ‘Then what advantage does the Jew have? And what is the benefit of circumcision?’” or “Some people might say, ‘If that is true, then the Jews do not have any advantage, and there is no benefit in being circumcised.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 3 2 rri9 figs-explicit πολὺ κατὰ πάντα τρόπον 1 It is great in every way Paul now responds to the concerns brought up in verse 1. Here, **It** refers to being a member of the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “But there is great advantage to being a Jew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ ROM 3 31 wb6r figs-rquestion νόμον οὖν καταργοῦμεν διὰ ROM 3 31 jdq1 figs-rquestion μὴ γένοιτο 1 May it never be This expression gives the strongest possible negative answer to the preceding rhetorical question. You may have a similar express in your language that you could use here. Alternate translation: “This is certainly not true” or “Certainly not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 3 31 y6qx νόμον ἱστάνομεν 1 we uphold the law “we obey the law” ROM 3 31 nzr7 figs-exclusive καταργοῦμεν 1 we uphold This pronoun refers to Paul, other believers, and the readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ROM 4 intro f9jc 0 # Romans 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The purpose of the law of Moses

Paul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God’s commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Circumcision

Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +ROM 4 intro f9jc 0 # Romans 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 7-8 of this chapter, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The purpose of the law of Moses

Paul builds upon material from chapter 3. He explains how Abraham, the father of Israel, was justified. Even Abraham could not be justified by what he did. Obeying the law of Moses does not make a person right with God. Obeying God’s commands is a way a person shows they believe in God. People have always been justified only by faith. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Circumcision

Circumcision was important to the Israelites. It identified a person as a descendant of Abraham. It was also a sign of the covenant between Abraham and Yahweh. However, no person was justified only by being circumcised. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) ROM 4 1 gw29 0 Connecting Statement: Paul confirms that even in the past believers were made right with God by faith and not by the law. ROM 4 1 gwp3 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν, εὑρηκέναι Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα 1 What then will we say that Abraham, our forefather according to the flesh, found? Paul uses the question to catch the attention of the reader and to start talking about something new. Alternate translation: “This is what Abraham our physical ancestor found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 4 3 w9i5 figs-rquestion τί γὰρ ἡ Γραφὴ λέγει 1 For what does the scripture say Paul uses this question to add emphasis. He speaks of the Scriptures as if they were alive and could talk. Alternate translation: “For we can read in the scripture” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ ROM 4 24 pfc9 figs-exclusive δι’ ἡμᾶς 1 for us The word **us** refers ROM 4 24 nh4k figs-activepassive καὶ δι’ ἡμᾶς, οἷς μέλλει λογίζεσθαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν 1 also for us, for whom it will be counted, we who believe You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “It was also for our benefit, because God will consider us righteous also if we believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ROM 4 24 a6c7 figs-idiom τὸν ἐγείραντα Ἰησοῦν, τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 him who raised Jesus our Lord from the dead **Raised … from the dead** here is an idiom for “caused to live again.” Alternate translation: “him who caused Jesus our Lord to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ROM 4 25 cca1 figs-activepassive ὃς παρεδόθη διὰ τὰ παραπτώματα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἠγέρθη διὰ τὴν δικαίωσιν ἡμῶν 1 who was delivered up for our trespasses and was raised for our justification You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave over to enemies for our trespasses and whom God brought back to life so he could make us right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 5 intro i1dt 0 # Romans 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Results of justification

How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

### “All sinned”

Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### The second Adam

Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) +ROM 5 intro i1dt 0 # Romans 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Many scholars view verses 12-17 as some of the most important, but difficult, verses in Scripture to understand. Some of their richness and meaning has likely been lost while being translated from how the original Greek was constructed.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Results of justification

How Paul explains the results of our being justified is an important part of this chapter. These results include having peace with God, having access to God, being confident about our future, being able to rejoice when suffering, being eternally saved, and being reconciled with God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/justice]])

### “All sinned”

Scholars are divided over what Paul meant in verse 12: “And death spread to all people, because all sinned.” Some believe that all of mankind was present in the “seed of Adam.” So, as Adam is the father of all mankind, all of mankind was present when Adam sinned. Others believe that Adam served as a representative head for mankind. So when he sinned, all of mankind “fell” as a result. Whether people today played an active or passive role in Adam’s original sin is one way these views differ. Other passages will help one decide. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/seed]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### The second Adam

Adam was the first man and the first “son” of God. He was created by God. He brought sin and death into the world by eating the forbidden fruit. Paul describes Jesus as the “second Adam” in this chapter and the true son of God. He brings life and overcame sin and death by dying on the cross. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) ROM 5 1 xmp3 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins to tell many different things that happen when God makes believers right with him. ROM 5 1 age4 δικαιωθέντες οὖν 1 Since we are justified “Because we are justified” ROM 5 1 s6xd figs-exclusive …ἡμῶν 1 we … our All occurrences of “we” and “our” refer to all believers and should be inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -375,7 +375,7 @@ ROM 5 21 wmy8 figs-personification ὥσπερ ἐβασίλευσεν ἡ ἁμ ROM 5 21 w4ut figs-personification οὕτως καὶ ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης, εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 even so grace might rule through righteousness for everlasting life through Jesus Christ our Lord Paul speaks of **grace** here as if it were a king that ruled. Alternate translation: “grace gave people everlasting life through the righteousness of Jesus Christ our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 5 21 m5by figs-personification οὕτως…ἡ χάρις βασιλεύσῃ διὰ δικαιοσύνης 1 so grace might rule through righteousness Paul speaks of **grace** here as if it were a king that ruled. The word **righteousness** refers to God’s ability to make people right with him. Alternate translation: “so God might give his free gift to people to make them right with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 5 21 ew1b figs-exclusive τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 our Lord Paul includes himself, his readers, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ROM 6 intro v522 0 # Romans 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Against the Law

In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this “antinomianism” or being “against the law.” To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Servants of sin

Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Death

Paul uses “death” many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) +ROM 6 intro v522 0 # Romans 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul begins this chapter by answering how someone might hypothetically object to what he taught in Chapter 5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Against the Law

In this chapter, Paul refutes the teaching that Christians can live however they want after they are saved. Scholars call this “antinomianism” or being “against the law.” To motivate godly living, Paul recalls the great price Jesus paid for a Christian to be saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Servants of sin

Before believing in Jesus, sin enslaves people. God frees Christians from serving sin. They are able to choose to serve Christ in their lives. Paul explains that when Christians choose to sin, they willingly choose to sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. It appears the intent of these rhetorical questions is to make the reader see their sin so they will trust in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Death

Paul uses “death” many different ways in this chapter: physical death, spiritual death, sin reigning in the heart of man, and to end something. He contrasts sin and death with the new life provided by Christ and the new way Christians are supposed to live after they are saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]]) ROM 6 1 x13n 0 Connecting Statement: Under grace, Paul tells those who believe in Jesus to live a new life as though dead to sin and alive to God. ROM 6 1 pvg3 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐροῦμεν? ἐπιμένωμεν τῇ ἁμαρτίᾳ, ἵνα ἡ χάρις πλεονάσῃ 1 What then will we say? Should we continue in sin so that grace may abound? Paul asks these rhetorical questions to get the attention of his readers. Alternate translation: “So, what should we say about all of this? We certainly should not keep on sinning so that God will give us more and more grace!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 6 1 fj9e figs-exclusive ἐροῦμεν 1 we say The pronoun “we” refers to Paul, his readers, and other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ ROM 6 22 npf3 figs-metaphor ἔχετε τὸν καρπὸν ὑμῶν εἰς ROM 6 22 a478 τὸ δὲ τέλος ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 The result is eternal life “The result of all of this is that you will live forever with God” ROM 6 23 ze3f τὰ γὰρ ὀψώνια τῆς ἁμαρτίας θάνατος 1 For the wages of sin are death The word **wages** refers to a payment given to someone for their work. “For if you serve sin, you will receive spiritual death as payment” or “For if you continue sinning, God will punish you with spiritual death” ROM 6 23 pf3s τὸ δὲ χάρισμα τοῦ Θεοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιος ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, τῷ Κυρίῳ ἡμῶν 1 but the gift of God is eternal life in Christ Jesus our Lord “but God gives eternal life to those who belong to Christ Jesus our Lord” -ROM 7 intro fl1y 0 # Romans 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “Or do you not know”

Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “We have been released from the law”

Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Marriage

Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +ROM 7 intro fl1y 0 # Romans 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “Or do you not know”

Paul uses this phrase to discuss a new topic, while connecting what follows with the previous teaching.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “We have been released from the law”

Paul explains that the law of Moses is no longer in effect. While this is true, the timeless principles behind the law reflect the character of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Marriage

Scripture commonly uses marriage as a metaphor. Here Paul uses it to describe how the church relates to the law of Moses and now to Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) ROM 7 1 nj1k 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains how the law controls those who want to live under the law. ROM 7 1 mk7w figs-rquestion ἢ ἀγνοεῖτε, ἀδελφοί (γινώσκουσιν γὰρ νόμον λαλῶ), ὅτι ὁ νόμος κυριεύει τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐφ’ ὅσον χρόνον ζῇ? 1 do you not know, brothers … that the law controls a person for as long as he lives? Paul asks this question to add emphasis. Alternate translation: “So you certainly know that people have to obey laws only while they are alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ROM 7 1 r9fl ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ ROM 7 24 nu6u με ῥύσεται 1 deliver me “rescue me” ROM 7 24 md8e figs-metaphor τοῦ σώματος τοῦ θανάτου τούτου 1 this body of death This is a metaphor that means a body that will experience physical death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ROM 7 25 w9ui χάρις τῷ Θεῷ διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 But thanks be to God through Jesus Christ our Lord This is the answer to the question in 7:24. ROM 7 25 adx1 figs-metaphor ἄρα οὖν αὐτὸς ἐγὼ, τῷ μὲν νοῒ δουλεύω νόμῳ Θεοῦ; τῇ δὲ σαρκὶ, νόμῳ ἁμαρτίας 1 So then, I myself serve the law of God with my mind. However, with the flesh I serve the principle of sin The mind and flesh are used here to show how they compare to serve either God’s law or the principle of sin. With the mind or intellect one can choose to please and obey God and with the flesh or physical nature to serve sin. Alternate translation: “My mind chooses to please God, but my flesh chooses to obey sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ROM 8 intro ev4r 0 # Romans 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Indwelling of the Spirit

The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “These are sons of God”

Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

### Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### No condemnation

This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word “condemn” has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being “condemned to hell.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) +ROM 8 intro ev4r 0 # Romans 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse of this chapter is a transitional sentence. Paul concludes his teaching of Chapter 7 and leads into the words of Chapter 8.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 36. Paul quotes these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Indwelling of the Spirit

The Holy Spirit is said to live inside a person or inside their heart. If the Spirit is present, this signifies that a person is saved. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### “These are sons of God”

Jesus is the Son of God in a unique way. God also adopts Christians to be his children. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sonofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

### Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some to be eternally saved. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter, especially with regards to elements of causation. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Paul poetically presents his teaching in verses 38 and 39 in the form of an extended metaphor. He explains that nothing can separate a person from the love of God in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### No condemnation

This phrase must be translated carefully to avoid doctrinal confusion. People are still guilty of their sin. God disapproves of acting sinfully, even after believing in Jesus. God still punishes the sins of believers, but Jesus has paid the punishment for their sin. This is what Paul expresses here. The word “condemn” has several possible meanings. Here Paul emphasizes that people who believe in Jesus are no longer punished eternally for their sin by being “condemned to hell.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/guilt]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]])

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that our physical bodies are sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that as long as Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) ROM 8 1 xq2y 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives the answer to the struggle he has with sin and good. ROM 8 1 xw65 figs-explicit οὐδὲν ἄρα νῦν κατάκριμα τοῖς ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 There is therefore now no condemnation for those who are in Christ Jesus Here, **condemnation** refers to punishing people. Alternate translation: “God will not condemn and punish those who are joined to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ROM 8 1 i12t ἄρα 1 therefore “for that reason” or “because what I have just told you is true” @@ -602,7 +602,7 @@ ROM 8 37 wcm6 figs-explicit διὰ τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς 1 ROM 8 38 fch1 πέπεισμαι 1 I have been convinced “I am convinced” or “I am confident” ROM 8 38 js9q ἀρχαὶ 1 governments This could mean: (1) This refers to demons. (2) This refers to human kings and rulers. ROM 8 38 q7ti οὔτε δυνάμεις 1 nor powers This could mean: (1) This refers to spiritual beings with power. (2) This refers to human beings with power. -ROM 9 intro w6f4 0 # Romans 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.

Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”

### Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Stone of stumbling

Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”

Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this. +ROM 9 intro w6f4 0 # Romans 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Paul changes what he is teaching about. In Chapters 9-11, he focuses on the nation of Israel.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 25-29 and 33 of this chapter. Paul quotes all of these words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

Paul uses the word “flesh” in this chapter only to refer to Israelites, people physically descending from Abraham through Jacob, who God named Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

In other chapters, Paul uses the word “brother” to mean fellow Christians. However, in this chapter, he uses “my brothers” to mean his kinsmen the Israelites.

Paul refers to those who believe in Jesus as “children of God” and “children of the promise.”

### Predestination

Many scholars believe Paul in this chapter teaches extensively on a subject known as “predestination.” This is related to the biblical concept of “predestine.” Some take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to eternally save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject. So translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

### Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Stone of stumbling

Paul explains that while some Gentiles accepted Jesus as their savior by believing in him, most Jews were trying to earn their salvation and so rejected Jesus. Paul, quoting the Old Testament, describes Jesus as a stone that the Jews stumble over when walking. This “stone of stumbling” causes them to “fall.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “It is not everyone in Israel who truly belongs to Israel”

Paul uses the word “Israel” in this verse with two different meanings. The first “Israel” means the physical descendants of Abraham through Jacob. The second “Israel” means those who are God’s people through faith. The UST reflects this. ROM 9 1 b89f 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells of his personal desire that the people of the nation of Israel will be saved. Then he emphasizes the different ways in which God has prepared them to believe. ROM 9 1 yg93 figs-doublet ἀλήθειαν λέγω ἐν Χριστῷ, οὐ ψεύδομαι 1 I tell the truth in Christ. I do not lie These two expressions mean basically the same thing. Paul uses them to emphasize that he is telling the truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ROM 9 1 h9mp συνμαρτυρούσης μοι τῆς συνειδήσεώς μου ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 my conscience bears witness with me in the Holy Spirit “the Holy Spirit controls my conscience and confirms what I say” diff --git a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv index 7d362d880b..ce6ef77714 100644 --- a/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1CO front intro e8ey 0 # Introduction to 1 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Corinthians

1. Divisions in the church (1:10-4:21)
1. Moral sins and irregularities (5:1-13)
1. Christians taking other Christians to court (6:1-20)
1. Marriage and related matters (7:1-40)
1. Misuse of Christian liberty; food sacrificed to idols, fleeing idolatry; women’s head coverings (8:1-13; 10:1-11:16)
1. Paul’s rights as an apostle (9:1-27)
1. The Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit (12:1-31)
1. Love (13:1-13)
1. The gifts of the Holy Spirit: prophecy and languages (14:1-40)
1. The resurrection of believers and the resurrection of Christ (15:1-58)
1. Closing: the contribution for Christians in Jerusalem, requests, and personal greetings (16:1-24)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Corinthians?

Paul wrote 1 Corinthians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church that met in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 1 Corinthians about?

1 Corinthians is a letter that Paul wrote to the believers who were in the city of Corinth. Paul had heard that there were problems among the believers there. They were arguing with each other. Some of them did not understand some of the Christian teachings. And some of them were behaving badly. In this letter, Paul responded to them and encouraged them to live in a way that pleased God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What was the problem with meat sacrificed to idols?

Many animals were slaughtered and sacrificed to the false gods in Corinth. Priests and worshipers kept some of the meat. Much of the meat was sold in markets. Many Christians disagreed with each other over whether it was right for them to eat this meat, because it had been dedicated to a false god. Paul writes about this problem in 1 Corinthians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 1 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, 1 Corinthians ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.” (See: 1:2; 3:17)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:1, 2; 14:33; 16:1, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.” (See: 1:2; 6:11; 7:14, 34)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What is the meaning of “flesh?”

Paul frequently used the terms “flesh” or “fleshly” to refer to Christians who did sinful things. However, it is not the physical world that is evil. Paul also described Christians who lived in a righteous way as “spiritual.” This is because they did what the Holy Spirit taught them to do. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:2, 30, 31; 3:1; 4:10, 15, 17; 6:11, 19; 7:22; 9:1, 2; 11:11, 25; 12:3, 9, 13, 18, 25; 14:16; 15:18, 19, 22, 31, 58; 16:19, 24. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “those who have been dedicated in Christ Jesus” (1:2), where Paul specifically meant that Christian believers have been dedicated to Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Corinthians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. Translators are advised to follow the modern versions of the Bible. However, if in the translators’ region there are Bibles that read according to older versions of the Bible, the translators can follow those. If so, these verses should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they were probably not original to 1 Corinthians.
* “Therefore glorify God with your body.” Some older versions read “Therefore glorify God with your body and in your spirit, which are God’s.” (6:20)
* “I did this even though I myself was not under the law” (9:20). Some older versions leave this passage out.
* “for the sake of conscience--the conscience of the other man.” Some older versions read “for the sake of conscience: for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord: the conscience of the other man.” (10:28)
* “and that I give my body to be burned” (13:3). Some older versions read, “and that I give my body so that I might boast.”
* “But if anyone does not recognize this, let him not be recognized” (14:38). Some older versions read, “But if anyone is ignorant of this, let him be ignorant.”


(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first three verses are a greeting. In the ancient Near East, this was a common way of starting a letter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Disunity

In this chapter, Paul scolds the church for being divided and for following different apostles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Spiritual gifts

Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities to help the church. The Holy Spirit gives these gifts to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. Paul lists spiritual gifts in Chapter 12. Some scholars believe the Holy Spirit gave some of these gifts only in the early church to help establish the developing church. Other scholars believe all the gifts of the Spirit are still available to help all Christians throughout the church history. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Idioms

In this chapter, Paul refers to the return of Christ using two different phrases: “the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ” and “the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the Corinthians for dividing into factions and for relying on human wisdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Stumbling block

A stumbling block is a rock people stumble over. Here it means the Jews find it hard to believe that God allowed his Messiah to be crucified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 1 intro ud5y 0 # 1 Corinthians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first three verses are a greeting. In the ancient Near East, this was a common way of starting a letter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Disunity

In this chapter, Paul scolds the church for being divided and for following different apostles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

### Spiritual gifts

Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities to help the church. The Holy Spirit gives these gifts to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. Paul lists spiritual gifts in Chapter 12. Some scholars believe the Holy Spirit gave some of these gifts only in the early church to help establish the developing church. Other scholars believe all the gifts of the Spirit are still available to help all Christians throughout the church history. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Idioms

In this chapter, Paul refers to the return of Christ using two different phrases: “the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ” and “the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions to scold the Corinthians for dividing into factions and for relying on human wisdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Stumbling block

A stumbling block is a rock people stumble over. Here it means the Jews find it hard to believe that God allowed his Messiah to be crucified. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 1 1 e8j3 Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. Alternate translation: “I, Paul” 1CO 1 1 qp1n translate-names Σωσθένης, ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Sosthenes our brother This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew Sosthenes. Alternate translation: “Sosthenes the brother you and I know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1CO 1 2 r9kg τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐν Κορίνθῳ 1 to the church of God at Corinth Your language may have a particular way of introducing the intended audience. Alternate translation: “wrote this letter to you in Corinth who believe in God” @@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 1 30 a7bs figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 us These words refer to Paul, those with him, and the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 1 30 f1at figs-metonymy Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ, ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 Christ Jesus, who was made for us wisdom from God This could mean: (1) This refers to Christ Jesus, who has made clear to us how wise God is. (2) This refers to Christ Jesus, who has given us God’s wisdom. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1CO 1 31 fym9 ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω 1 Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord “If a person boasts, he should boast about how great the Lord is” -1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wisdom

Paul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase “hidden wisdom” when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]]) +1CO 2 intro k86p 0 # 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Wisdom

Paul continues the discussion from the first chapter that contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. For Paul, wisdom can be simple and human ideas foolish. He said the wisdom from the Holy Spirit is the only true wisdom. Paul uses the phrase “hidden wisdom” when he refers to previously unknown truths. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]]) 1CO 2 1 kjc7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul contrasts human wisdom and God’s wisdom. He emphasizes that spiritual wisdom comes from God. 1CO 2 1 qvj7 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. 1CO 2 2 a2g9 figs-hyperbole ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι…εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν 1 I decided to know nothing … except Jesus Christ When Paul said that he “decided to know nothing” he exaggerated to emphasize that he decided focus on and teach about nothing other than Jesus Christ. Alternate translation: “I decided to teach nothing … except Jesus Christ” or “I decided not to teach anything … except Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 2 14 gwe3 ὅτι πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται 1 because they are spiritually discerned “because understanding these things requires the aid of the Spirit” 1CO 2 15 w4q7 ὁ…πνευματικὸς 1 the one who is spiritual “The believer who has received the Spirit” 1CO 2 16 m4pu figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ὃς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν? 1 For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him? Paul uses this question to emphasize that no one knows the mind of the Lord. No one is as wise as the Lord. Alternate translation: “No one can know the mind of the Lord, so no one can teach him anything he does not already know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 3 intro g6ku 0 # 1 Corinthians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fleshly people

The Corinthian believers were immature because of their unrighteous actions. He calls them “fleshly,” meaning acting as nonbelievers. This term is used in opposition to those who are “spiritual.” Christians following their “flesh” are acting foolishly. They are following the wisdom of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

There are many metaphors in this chapter. Paul uses “babies” and “milk” to illustrate spiritual immaturity. He uses the metaphors of planting and watering to describe the roles he and Apollos played in growing the church in Corinth. Paul uses other metaphors to help teach spiritual truths to the Corinthians and to help them to understand his teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1CO 3 intro g6ku 0 # 1 Corinthians 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fleshly people

The Corinthian believers were immature because of their unrighteous actions. He calls them “fleshly,” meaning acting as nonbelievers. This term is used in opposition to those who are “spiritual.” Christians following their “flesh” are acting foolishly. They are following the wisdom of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/foolish]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

There are many metaphors in this chapter. Paul uses “babies” and “milk” to illustrate spiritual immaturity. He uses the metaphors of planting and watering to describe the roles he and Apollos played in growing the church in Corinth. Paul uses other metaphors to help teach spiritual truths to the Corinthians and to help them to understand his teachings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 3 1 a43d 0 Connecting Statement: Paul now reminds the Corinthian believers of how they are actually living instead of behaving as their position before God is. He then reminds them that the person who teaches them is not as important as God who gives their growth. 1CO 3 1 r4iw ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. 1CO 3 1 jx17 πνευματικοῖς 1 spiritual people people who obey the Spirit @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 3 20 la6x Κύριος γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι 1 The Lord knows that the reasoning of the wise is futile “The Lord knows that what people who think they are wise plan to do is futile” 1CO 3 20 kz2u μάταιοι 1 futile useless 1CO 3 23 nj48 ὑμεῖς δὲ Χριστοῦ, Χριστὸς δὲ Θεοῦ 1 you are Christ’s, and Christ is God’s “you belong to Christ, and Christ belongs to God” -1CO 4 intro vg5z 0 # 1 Corinthians 04 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pride

Paul contrasts the Corinthians being proud with the apostles being humble. The Corinthian believers had no reason to be proud. All that they had, and all they were, was a gift from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. He describes the apostles as servants. Paul speaks of a victory parade where the apostles are the prisoners who will be killed. He uses a rod to stand for punishment. He calls himself their father because he is their “spiritual father.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### Irony

Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians for being proud. The Corinthian believers are reigning but the apostles are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +1CO 4 intro vg5z 0 # 1 Corinthians 4 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pride

Paul contrasts the Corinthians being proud with the apostles being humble. The Corinthian believers had no reason to be proud. All that they had, and all they were, was a gift from God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/apostle]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. He describes the apostles as servants. Paul speaks of a victory parade where the apostles are the prisoners who will be killed. He uses a rod to stand for punishment. He calls himself their father because he is their “spiritual father.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### Irony

Paul uses irony to shame the Corinthians for being proud. The Corinthian believers are reigning but the apostles are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) 1CO 4 1 k1v5 0 Connecting Statement: Having just reminded the people not to be proud concerning who taught them about the Lord and who had baptized them, Paul reminds the Corinthian believers that all believers are to be humble servants. 1CO 4 2 th8e figs-123person ὧδε λοιπὸν ζητεῖται ἐν τοῖς οἰκονόμοις 1 what is required of stewards Paul is speaking of himself as if he were speaking about other people. Alternate translation: “we are required to be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) 1CO 4 3 k6nc ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν, ἵνα ὑφ’ ὑμῶν ἀνακριθῶ 1 it is a very small thing that I should be judged by you Paul is comparing the difference between human judgment and God’s judgment. Man’s judgment is not important compared to God’s true judgment upon man. @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 4 21 ix5g figs-rquestion τί θέλετε? 1 What do you want? Paul was making a last appeal to the Corinthians, as he has been rebuking them for the errors they had made. Alternate translation: “Tell me what you want to happen now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 21 wv61 figs-rquestion ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἢ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος? 1 Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness? Paul is offering the Corinthians two opposing attitudes he could use when approaching them. Alternate translation: “If you want, I can come to punish you, or I can come to show you how much I love you by being gentle with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 4 21 ix7l πραΰτητος 1 of gentleness “of kindness” or “of tenderness” -1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms

Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])

### Metaphor

Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don’t you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +1CO 5 intro vb3l 0 # 1 Corinthians 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms

Paul uses euphemisms to describe sensitive topics. This chapter deals with sexual immorality of one church member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])

### Metaphor

Paul uses an extended comparison using many metaphors. Yeast represents evil. The loaf probably represents the whole congregation. The unleavened bread represents living purely. So the whole passage means: Don’t you know that a little evil will affect the whole congregation? So get rid of the evil so you can live purely. Christ has been sacrificed for us. So let us be sincere and truthful and not wicked and behaving badly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/purify]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) 1CO 5 1 e66c 0 Connecting Statement: Paul now specifically states about what sin of theirs he has heard, and how the Corinthian believers are proud of their acceptance of that man and his sin. 1CO 5 1 dlj2 figs-activepassive ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 which does not even exist among the Gentiles You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that not even the Gentiles permit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 5 1 b9xn γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔχειν 1 a man has his father’s wife “A man among you is commiting adultery with his father’s wife” @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 5 11 b4us ἀδελφὸς 1 brother Here this means a fellow Christian, either a man or a woman. 1CO 5 12 xeu7 figs-rquestion τί…μοι τοὺς ἔξω κρίνειν? 1 how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church? Paul is emphasizing that he is not the one to judge people outside the church. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am not the one who should judge people who do not belong to the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 5 12 m4s6 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ τοὺς ἔσω ὑμεῖς κρίνετε? 1 Are you not to judge those inside? Paul is scolding the Corinthians. “you should know that you are the ones who should judge those who are inside the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -1CO 6 intro s6hb 0 # 1 Corinthians 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Lawsuits

Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. It is especially bad to use a court to cheat another believer. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +1CO 6 intro s6hb 0 # 1 Corinthians 6 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Lawsuits

Paul teaches that a Christian should not take another Christian to court before a non-Christian judge. It is better to be cheated. Christians will judge the angels. So they should be able to solve problems among themselves. It is especially bad to use a court to cheat another believer. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

The temple of the Holy Spirit is an important metaphor. It refers to the place where the Holy Spirit stays and is worshiped. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize important points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) 1CO 6 1 hv79 0 Connecting Statement: Paul then explains how believers are to settle disagreements with other believers. 1CO 6 1 q5d3 πρᾶγμα 1 dispute disagreement or argument 1CO 6 1 gmy5 figs-rquestion τολμᾷ…κρίνεσθαι…τῶν ἁγίων? 1 does he dare to go … saints? Paul is emphasizing that Christians must resolve disagreements among themselves. Alternate translation: “he should not dare to go … saints!” or “he should be fear God and not go … saints!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 6 19 d2mc figs-metaphor ναὸς τοῦ…Ἁγίου Πνεύματός 1 temple of the Holy Spirit A temple is dedicated to divine beings, and it is also where they dwell. In the same way, each Corinthian believer’s body is like a temple because the Holy Spirit is present within them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1CO 6 20 qv47 figs-activepassive ἠγοράσθητε γὰρ τιμῆς 1 For you were bought with a price God paid for the freedom of the Corinthians from the slavery of sin. You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “God paid for your freedom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1CO 6 20 y7fe δὴ 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true” -1CO 7 intro a25m 0 # 1 Corinthians 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Divorce

Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms

Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +1CO 7 intro a25m 0 # 1 Corinthians 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul begins to answer a series of questions that the Corinthians may have asked him. The first question is about marriage. The second question is about a slave trying to become free, a Gentile becoming a Jew, or a Jew becoming a Gentile.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Divorce

Paul says married Christians should not divorce. A Christian married to an unbeliever should not leave their husband or wife. If the unbelieving husband or wife leaves, this is not a sin. Paul advises that, because of the difficult times and being near to time that Jesus will return, it is acceptable to remain unmarried. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Euphemisms

Paul uses many euphemisms to discreetly refer to sexual relations. This is often a sensitive topic. Many cultures do not wish to speak openly about these matters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) 1CO 7 1 iue7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul gives the believers some specific instructions on marriage. 1CO 7 1 y4lx δὲ 1 Now Paul is introducing a new topic in his teaching. 1CO 7 1 jq21 ὧν ἐγράψατε 1 the issues you wrote about The Corinthians had written a letter to Paul to ask for answers to certain questions. @@ -359,7 +359,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 7 40 hwz4 τὴν ἐμὴν γνώμην 1 my judgment “my understanding of God’s word” 1CO 7 40 hd7f μακαριωτέρα 1 happier more contented, more joyful 1CO 7 40 pse4 οὕτως μείνῃ 1 lives as she is “remains unmarried” -1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Meat sacrificed to idols

Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol. +1CO 8 intro c8l6 0 # 1 Corinthians 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In Chapters 8-10, Paul answers the question: “Is it acceptable to eat meat that has been sacrificed to an idol?”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Meat sacrificed to idols

Paul answers this question by saying that idols are gods that do not really exist. Therefore nothing is wrong with the meat. Christians are free to eat it. However, someone who does not understand this may see a Christian eating it. They may then be encouraged to eat the meat as an act of worship to the idol. 1CO 8 1 jf6h figs-exclusive 0 General Information: “We” means Paul and, though specifically writing to the Corinthian believers, includes all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1CO 8 1 nzt4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers that though idols have no power, believers must be careful not to affect the weaker believers who might think they care about the idols. He tells believers to be careful with the liberty believers have in Christ. 1CO 8 1 cep1 περὶ δὲ 1 Now about Paul uses this phrase to move on to the next question the Corinthians had asked him. @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1CO 8 11 g5tn ἀπόλλυται…ὁ ἀσθενῶν 1 the one who is weak … is destroyed The brother or sister who is not strong in his or her faith will sin or lose his or her faith. 1CO 8 13 i8tb διόπερ 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true” 1CO 8 13 vf92 figs-metonymy εἰ βρῶμα σκανδαλίζει 1 if food causes to stumble **Food** here is a metonym for the person eating the food. Alternate translation: “if I cause by eating” or “if I, because of what I eat, cause” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1CO 9 intro z8d4 0 # 1 Corinthians 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Earning money from the church

People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Contextualization

This passage is important because Paul “contextualizes” ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this “contextualization” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) +1CO 9 intro z8d4 0 # 1 Corinthians 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul defends himself in this chapter. Some people claimed that he was trying to gain financially from the church.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Earning money from the church

People accused Paul of just wanting money from the church. Paul answered that he rightfully could get money from the church. The Old Testament taught that those who worked should get their living from their work. He and Barnabas purposefully never used this right and earned their own living.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Paul uses many metaphors in this chapter. These metaphors teach complex truths. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Contextualization

This passage is important because Paul “contextualizes” ministering the gospel to different audiences. This means that Paul makes himself and the gospel understandable without his actions hindering the gospel being received. The translator should take extra care to preserve aspects of this “contextualization” if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses many rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to emphasize various points as he teaches the Corinthians. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion) 1CO 9 1 fu7x 0 Connecting Statement: Paul explains how he uses the liberty he has in Christ. 1CO 9 1 mdm4 figs-rquestion οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐλεύθερος 1 Am I not free? Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am a free person.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1CO 9 1 dbp9 figs-rquestion οὐκ εἰμὶ ἀπόστολος 1 Am I not an apostle? Paul uses this rhetorical question to remind the Corinthians of who he is and the rights he has. Alternate translation: “I am an apostle.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) diff --git a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv index cac41d204f..bfd7e93b2d 100644 --- a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 2CO front intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians

1. Paul thanks God for the Corinthian Christians (1:1-11)
1. Paul explains his conduct and his ministry (1:12-7:16)
1. Paul speaks about contributing money for the Jerusalem church (8:1-9:15)
1. Paul defends his authority as an apostle (10:1-13:10)
1. Paul gives final greetings and encouragement (13:11-14)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?

Paul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?

In 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.

Paul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?

These were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?

Paul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?
* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -2CO 1 intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.

## Special Concepts

### Paul’s integrity

People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.

### Comfort

Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical question

Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Guarantee

Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian’s eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God’s given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) +2CO 1 intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.

## Special Concepts

### Paul’s integrity

People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.

### Comfort

Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical question

Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Guarantee

Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian’s eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God’s given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) 2CO 1 1 epd2 0 General Information: After Paul’s greeting to the church in Corinth, he writes about suffering and comfort through Jesus Christ. Timothy is with him as well. The word “you” throughout this letter refers to the people of the church in Corinth and to the rest of the Christians in that area. Possibly Timothy writes on parchment paper the words that Paul says. 2CO 1 1 mel3 Παῦλος…τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ 1 Paul … to the church of God that is in Corinth Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul … wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth” 2CO 1 1 f59u Τιμόθεος ὁ ἀδελφὸς 1 Timothy our brother This indicates that both Paul and the Corinthians knew Timothy and considered him to be their spiritual brother. @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 1 23 j15t ὅτι φειδόμενος ὑμῶν 1 so that I might spare you “so that I might not cause you more suffering” 2CO 1 24 cyu4 συνεργοί ἐσμεν τῆς χαρᾶς ὑμῶν 1 we are fellow workers with you for your joy “we are working with you so that you may have joy” 2CO 1 24 cih8 figs-idiom τῇ…πίστει ἑστήκατε 1 you stand firm in the faith The word **stand** can refer to something that does not change. Alternate translation: “remain firm in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -2CO 2 intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 02 General Notes

## Special Concepts

### Harsh writing

In this chapter, Paul refers to a letter he previously wrote to the Corinthians. That letter had a harsh and corrective tone. Paul probably wrote it after the letter known as First Corinthians and before this letter. He implies that the church had to rebuke an erring member. Paul is now encouraging them to be gracious to that person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Aroma

A sweet aroma is a pleasing smell. Scripture often describes things that are pleasing to God as having a pleasing aroma. +2CO 2 intro hy3h 0 # 2 Corinthians 2 General Notes

## Special Concepts

### Harsh writing

In this chapter, Paul refers to a letter he previously wrote to the Corinthians. That letter had a harsh and corrective tone. Paul probably wrote it after the letter known as First Corinthians and before this letter. He implies that the church had to rebuke an erring member. Paul is now encouraging them to be gracious to that person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Aroma

A sweet aroma is a pleasing smell. Scripture often describes things that are pleasing to God as having a pleasing aroma. 2CO 2 1 wh9c 0 Connecting Statement: Because of his great love for them, Paul makes it clear that his rebuke in his first letter to them (the rebuke of their acceptance of the sin of immorality) caused him pain as well as pain to the church people in Corinth and the immoral man. 2CO 2 1 x9s5 ἔκρινα γὰρ ἐμαυτῷ 1 I personally decided “I made the decision” 2CO 2 1 ij73 ἐν λύπῃ 1 in sorrow “in circumstances that would cause you pain” @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 2 17 x86y εἰλικρινείας 1 sincerity “pure motives” 2CO 2 17 u2zb ἐν Χριστῷ λαλοῦμεν 1 we speak in Christ “we speak as people who are joined to Christ” or “we speak with the authority of Christ” 2CO 2 17 q4dc figs-ellipsis κατέναντι Θεοῦ 1 before God Paul and his coworkers preach the gospel with the awareness that God is watching them. Alternate translation: “we speak in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2CO 3 intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues his defense. Paul views the Corinthian Christians as the proof of his work.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Law of Moses

Paul alludes to God giving the Ten Commandments on stone tablets. This represents the law of Moses. The law was good because it came from God. But God punished the Israelites because they disobeyed it. This chapter may be difficult for translators to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Paul uses many metaphors used in this chapter to explain complex spiritual truths. It is unclear whether this makes Paul’s teachings easier or more difficult to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “This is a covenant not of the letter but of the Spirit.”

Paul contrasts the old and new covenants. The new covenant is not a system of rules and regulations. Here, **Spirit** probably refers to the Holy Spirit. It may also refer to the new covenant being “spiritual” in nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) +2CO 3 intro f7rh 0 # 2 Corinthians 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues his defense. Paul views the Corinthian Christians as the proof of his work.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Law of Moses

Paul alludes to God giving the Ten Commandments on stone tablets. This represents the law of Moses. The law was good because it came from God. But God punished the Israelites because they disobeyed it. This chapter may be difficult for translators to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Paul uses many metaphors used in this chapter to explain complex spiritual truths. It is unclear whether this makes Paul’s teachings easier or more difficult to understand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “This is a covenant not of the letter but of the Spirit.”

Paul contrasts the old and new covenants. The new covenant is not a system of rules and regulations. Here, **Spirit** probably refers to the Holy Spirit. It may also refer to the new covenant being “spiritual” in nature. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) 2CO 3 1 m1k8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds them that he is not boasting as he tells them about what he has done through Christ. 2CO 3 1 um8x figs-rquestion ἀρχόμεθα πάλιν ἑαυτοὺς συνιστάνειν? 1 Are we beginning to praise ourselves again? Paul uses this question to emphasize that they are not bragging about themselves. Alternate translation: “We are not beginning to praise ourselves again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2CO 3 1 y8yc figs-rquestion ἢ μὴ χρῄζομεν, ὥς τινες, συστατικῶν ἐπιστολῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἢ ἐξ ὑμῶν? 1 We do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people, do we? Paul says this to express that the Corinthians already know about Paul and Timothy’s good reputation. The question prompts a negative answer. Alternate translation: “We certainly do not need letters of recommendation to you or from you, like some people do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 3 18 rc9x figs-activepassive τὴν αὐτὴν εἰκόνα μεταμορφούμεθα 1 are being transformed into the same image The Spirit is changing believers to be glorious like him. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The Lord is transforming us into his same glorious likeness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 3 18 bx5b ἀπὸ δόξης εἰς δόξαν 1 from glory to glory “from one amount of glory to another amount of glory.” This means that the Spirit is constantly increasing the glory of believers. 2CO 3 18 mw3v καθάπερ ἀπὸ Κυρίου 1 just as from the Lord “just as this comes from the Lord” -2CO 4 intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter begins with the word “therefore.” This connects it to what the previous chapter teaches. How these chapters are divided may be confusing to the reader.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ministry

Paul ministers to people by telling them about Christ. He does not try to trick people into believing. If they do not understand the gospel, it is because the problem is ultimately spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Life and death

Paul does not refer here to physical life and death. Life represents the new life a Christian has in Jesus. Death represents the old way of living before believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Hope

Paul uses a repeated pattern in a purposeful way. He makes a statement. Then he denies a seemingly opposite or contradictory statement or gives an exception. Together these give the reader hope in difficult circumstances. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]]) +2CO 4 intro rx1c 0 # 2 Corinthians 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter begins with the word “therefore.” This connects it to what the previous chapter teaches. How these chapters are divided may be confusing to the reader.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ministry

Paul ministers to people by telling them about Christ. He does not try to trick people into believing. If they do not understand the gospel, it is because the problem is ultimately spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Life and death

Paul does not refer here to physical life and death. Life represents the new life a Christian has in Jesus. Death represents the old way of living before believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Hope

Paul uses a repeated pattern in a purposeful way. He makes a statement. Then he denies a seemingly opposite or contradictory statement or gives an exception. Together these give the reader hope in difficult circumstances. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]]) 2CO 4 1 lyi4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul writes that he is honest in his ministry by preaching Christ, not praising himself. He shows the death and the life of Jesus in how he lives so that life can work in the Corinthian believers. 2CO 4 1 ix7n figs-exclusive ἔχοντες τὴν διακονίαν ταύτην 1 having this ministry Here the word **we** refers to Paul and his coworker, but not to the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2CO 4 1 h1ud figs-explicit καθὼς ἠλεήθημεν 1 and just as we have received mercy This phrase explains how Paul and his coworkers “have this ministry.” It is a gift that God has given to them through his mercy. Alternate translation: “because God has shown us mercy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 4 17 na9y figs-metaphor καθ’ ὑπερβολὴν εἰς ὑπερβολὴν 1 that exceeds all measurement The glory that Paul will experience is so heavy that no one can measure it. You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that no one can measure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 4 18 t2fp figs-activepassive τὰ βλεπόμενα…τὰ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 things that are seen … things that are unseen You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “things that we can see … things that we cannot see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 4 18 f97x figs-ellipsis τὰ δὲ μὴ βλεπόμενα 1 but for things that are unseen You can supply the verb for this phrase. AT “but we are watching for things that are unseen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -2CO 5 intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 05 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New bodies in heaven

Paul knows that when he dies he will receive a much better body. Because of this, he is not afraid of being killed for preaching the gospel. So he tells others that they too can be reconciled to God. Christ will take away their sin and give them his righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### New creation

The old and new creation probably refers to how Paul illustrates the old and new self. These concepts are also the same as the old and new man. The term “old” probably does not refer to the sinful nature with which a person is born. It refers to the old way of living or the Christian formerly being bound to sin. The “new creation” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Home

The Christian’s home is no longer in the world. A Christian’s real home is in heaven. By using this metaphor, Paul emphasizes that the Christian’s circumstances in this world are temporary. It gives hope to those who are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The message of reconciliation”

This refers to the gospel. Paul calls for people who are hostile to God to repent and be reconciled to him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]]) +2CO 5 intro s14p 0 # 2 Corinthians 5 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New bodies in heaven

Paul knows that when he dies he will receive a much better body. Because of this, he is not afraid of being killed for preaching the gospel. So he tells others that they too can be reconciled to God. Christ will take away their sin and give them his righteousness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### New creation

The old and new creation probably refers to how Paul illustrates the old and new self. These concepts are also the same as the old and new man. The term “old” probably does not refer to the sinful nature with which a person is born. It refers to the old way of living or the Christian formerly being bound to sin. The “new creation” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Home

The Christian’s home is no longer in the world. A Christian’s real home is in heaven. By using this metaphor, Paul emphasizes that the Christian’s circumstances in this world are temporary. It gives hope to those who are suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hope]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The message of reconciliation”

This refers to the gospel. Paul calls for people who are hostile to God to repent and be reconciled to him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reconcile]]) 2CO 5 1 p7b7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues by contrasting believers’ earthly bodies to the heavenly ones God will give. 2CO 5 1 z4vs figs-metaphor ἐὰν ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ, οἰκοδομὴν ἐκ Θεοῦ ἔχομεν 1 if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed, we have a building from God Here a temporary **earthly dwelling** is a metaphor for a person’s physical body. Here a permanent “building from God” is a metaphor for the new body that God will give believers after they die. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2CO 5 1 zy2k figs-activepassive ἐὰν ἡ ἐπίγειος ἡμῶν οἰκία τοῦ σκήνους καταλυθῇ 1 if the earthly dwelling that we live in is destroyed You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “if people destroy the earthly dwelling that we live in” or “if people kill our bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -264,7 +264,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 5 21 ebz2 τὸν μὴ γνόντα ἁμαρτίαν 1 The one who did not know sin “Christ is the one who never sinned” 2CO 5 21 zm9e δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 the righteousness of God in him “God did this … the righteousness of God in Christ” 2CO 5 21 kmt9 figs-explicit ἵνα ἡμεῖς γενώμεθα δικαιοσύνη Θεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 so that we might become the righteousness of God in him The phrase **the righteousness of God** refers to the righteousness that God requires and which comes from God. Alternate translation: “so that we might have God’s righteousness in us through Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2CO 6 intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Servants

Paul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Contrasts

Paul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people. +2CO 6 intro f5qu 0 # 2 Corinthians 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 2 and 16-18, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Servants

Paul refers to Christians as servants of God. God calls Christians to serve him in all circumstances. Paul describes some of the difficult circumstances in which he and his companions served God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Contrasts

Paul uses four pairs of contrasts: righteousness versus lawlessness, light versus darkness, Christ versus Satan, and the temple of God versus idols. These contrasts show a difference between Christians and non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/light]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/darkness]])

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Rhetorical questions

Paul uses a series of rhetorical questions to teach his readers. All of these questions make essentially the same point: Christians should not intimately fellowship with those who live in sin. Paul repeats these questions for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people. 2CO 6 1 in53 0 General Information: In verse 2, Paul quotes a portion from the prophet Isaiah. 2CO 6 1 kf1d 0 Connecting Statement: Paul summarizes how working together for God is supposed to be. 2CO 6 1 tbr6 figs-explicit συνεργοῦντες 1 Working together Paul is implying that he and Timothy are working with God. Alternate translation: “Working together with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 6 17 fe1z 0 General Information: Paul quotes portions from the Old Testament prophets, Isaiah and Ezekiel. 2CO 6 17 z5ld figs-activepassive ἀφορίσθητε 1 be separate You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “set yourselves apart” or “allow me to set you apart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 6 17 c8jq figs-doublenegatives ἀκαθάρτου μὴ ἅπτεσθε 1 Touch no unclean thing You can state this in positive terms. Alternate translation: “Touch only things that are clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -2CO 7 intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus’ return and the comfort it brought.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Clean and unclean

Christians are “clean” in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Sadness and sorrow

The words “sad” and “sorrow” in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Original situation

This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2CO 7 intro hg36 0 # 2 Corinthians 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 2-4, Paul finishes his defense. He then writes about Titus’ return and the comfort it brought.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Clean and unclean

Christians are “clean” in the sense that God has cleansed them from sin. They do not need to be concerned with being clean according to the law of Moses. Ungodly living can still make a Christian unclean. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Sadness and sorrow

The words “sad” and “sorrow” in this chapter indicate that the Corinthians were upset to the point of repenting. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Original situation

This chapter discusses in detail a previous situation. We can figure out some aspects of this situation from the information in this chapter. But it is best not to include this type of implicit information in a translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2CO 7 1 e7t9 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind them to be separated from sin and to seek holiness purposefully. 2CO 7 1 h5xv ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved “You whom I love” or “Dear friends” 2CO 7 1 fv49 καθαρίσωμεν ἑαυτοὺς 1 let us cleanse ourselves Here Paul is saying to stay away from any form of sin that would affect one’s relationship with God. @@ -352,7 +352,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 7 15 d87j figs-abstractnouns τὴν πάντων ὑμῶν ὑπακοήν 1 the obedience of all of you You can state this noun “obedience” with a verb, “obey.” Alternate translation: “how all of you obeyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2CO 7 15 g9bz figs-doublet μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου ἐδέξασθε αὐτόν 1 you welcomed him with fear and trembling Here, **fear** and **trembling** share similar meanings and emphasize the intensity of fear. Alternate translation: “you welcomed him with great reverence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 2CO 7 15 q47h μετὰ φόβου καὶ τρόμου 1 with fear and trembling This could mean: (1) This refers to great reverence for God. (2) This refers to great reverence for Titus. -2CO 8 intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gift to the church in Jerusalem

The church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Paradox

A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: “the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity.” In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](../08/02.md)) +2CO 8 intro kl7m 0 # 2 Corinthians 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapters 8 and 9 begin a new section. Paul writes about how churches in Greece helped needy believers in Jerusalem.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 15.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gift to the church in Jerusalem

The church in Corinth started preparing to give money to the poor believers in Jerusalem. The churches in Macedonia also had given generously. Paul sends Titus and two other believers to Corinth to encourage the Corinthians to give generously. Paul and the others will carry the money to Jerusalem. They want people to know it is being done honestly.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul likely uses the pronoun “we” to represent at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Paradox

A “paradox” is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. These words in verse 2 are a paradox: “the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity.” In verse 3 Paul explains how their poverty produced riches. Paul also uses riches and poverty in other paradoxes. ([2 Corinthians 8:2](../08/02.md)) 2CO 8 1 mm8g 0 Connecting Statement: Having explained his changed plans and his ministry direction, Paul talks about giving. 2CO 8 1 d1mj figs-activepassive τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δεδομένην ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Μακεδονίας 1 the grace of God that has been given to the churches of Macedonia You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the grace that God has given to the churches of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 8 2 fsq8 figs-personification ἡ περισσεία τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτῶν καὶ ἡ κατὰ βάθους πτωχεία αὐτῶν, ἐπερίσσευσεν εἰς τὸ πλοῦτος τῆς ἁπλότητος αὐτῶν 1 the abundance of their joy and the extremity of their poverty have produced great riches of generosity Paul speaks of “joy” and “poverty” as if they were living things that can produce generosity. Alternate translation: “because of the people’s great joy and extreme poverty, they have become very generous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 8 23 lat3 εἴτε ἀδελφοὶ ἡμῶν 1 As for our brothers This refers to the two other men who will accompany Titus. 2CO 8 23 u8lx figs-activepassive ἀπόστολοι ἐκκλησιῶν 1 they are sent by the churches You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the churches have sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2CO 8 23 a8v2 figs-abstractnouns δόξα Χριστοῦ 1 an honor to Christ You can state this with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “They will cause people to honor Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -2CO 9 intro lt8d 0 # 2 Corinthians 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Paul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]]) +2CO 9 intro lt8d 0 # 2 Corinthians 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 9, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

Paul uses three agricultural metaphors. He uses them to teach about giving to needy believers. The metaphors help Paul explain that God will reward those who give generously. Paul does not say how or when God will reward them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]]) 2CO 9 1 rd2g translate-names 0 General Information: When Paul refers to Achaia, he is talking about a Roman province located in southern Greece where Corinth is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2CO 9 1 wc5l 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues on the subject of giving. He wants to make sure that the collection of their offering for the needy believers in Jerusalem takes place before he comes so that it does not seem as though he takes advantage of them. He talks about how giving blesses the giver and glorifies God. 2CO 9 1 fxs3 figs-explicit τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους 1 the ministry that is for the saints This refers to the collection of money to give to the believers in Jerusalem. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the ministry for the believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv index 6197897484..7d36745954 100644 --- a/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_49-GAL.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote GAL front intro i6u9 0 # Introduction to Galatians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Galatians

1. Paul declares his authority as an apostle of Jesus Christ; he says that he is surprised by the false teachings that the Christians in Galatia have accepted from other people (1:1-10).
1. Paul says that people are saved by trusting in Christ alone, not by keeping the law (1:11-2:21).
1. God puts people right with himself only when they trust in Christ; the example of Abraham; the curse which the law brings (and not a means of salvation); slavery and freedom compared and illustrated by Hagar and Sarah (3:1-4:31).
1. When people are joined to Christ, they become free from having to keep the law of Moses. They are also free to live as the Holy Spirit guides them. They are free to refuse the demands of sin. They are free to bear each other’s burdens (5:1-6:10).
1. Paul warns the Christians not to trust in being circumcised and in keeping the law of Moses. Instead, they must trust in Christ (6:11-18).

### Who wrote the Book of Galatians?

Paul from the city of Tarsus was the author. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he began to trust in Jesus Christ, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

It is uncertain when Paul wrote this letter and where he was when he wrote it. Some scholars think Paul was in the city of Ephesus and wrote this letter after the second time he traveled to tell people about Jesus. Other scholars think Paul was in the city of Antioch in Syria and wrote the letter soon after the first time he traveled.

### What is the Book of Galatians about?

Paul wrote this letter to both Jewish and non-Jewish Christians in the region of Galatia. He wanted to write against the false teachers who said that Christians need to follow the law of Moses. Paul defended the gospel by explaining that a person is saved by believing in Jesus Christ. People are saved as result of God being kind and not as a result of people doing good works. No person can perfectly obey the law. Any attempt to please God by obeying the law of Moses will only result in God condemning them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Galatians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Galatia.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What does it mean to “live like Jews” (2:14)?

To “live like Jews” means to obey the law of Moses, even though one trusts in Christ. The people among the early Christians who taught that this was necessary were called “Judaizers.”

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How did Paul use the terms “law” and “grace” in the Book of Galatians?

These terms are used in a unique way in Galatians. There is an important teaching in Galatians about Christian living. Under the law of Moses, righteous or holy living required a person to obey a set of rules and regulations. As Christians, holy living is now motivated by grace. This means that Christians have freedom in Christ and are not required to obey a specific set of rules. Instead, Christians are to live a holy life because they are thankful that God has been so kind to them. This is called “the law of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:22; 2:4, 17; 3:14, 26, 28; 5:6, 10. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “when we seek for God to justify us in Christ” (2:17), where Paul spoke of being justified by means of Christ.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Galatians?
* “Foolish Galatians, whose evil eye has harmed you? Was not Jesus Christ depicted as crucified before your eyes” (3:1)? The ULT, UST, and the other modern versions have this reading. However, older versions of the Bible add, “[so] that ye should not obey the truth.” Translators are advised not to include this expression. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have the passage, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to Galatians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -GAL 1 intro f3n5 0 # Galatians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Heresy

God eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. They might not be saved. They should be treated as non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])

### Paul’s qualifications

Some people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But God still needed to save him and show him the true gospel. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”

The Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +GAL 1 intro f3n5 0 # Galatians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul started this letter differently than his other letters. He adds that he was “not an apostle from men nor by human agency, but through Jesus Christ and God the Father, who raised him from the dead ones.” Paul probably included these words because false teachers were opposing him and trying to undermine his authority.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Heresy

God eternally saves people only through the true, biblical gospel. God condemns any other version of the gospel. Paul asks God to curse those who teach a false gospel. They might not be saved. They should be treated as non-Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/goodnews]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/condemn]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/curse]])

### Paul’s qualifications

Some people in the early church were teaching that Gentiles needed to obey the law of Moses. To refute this teaching, in verses 13-16 Paul explains how he was formerly a zealous Jew. But God still needed to save him and show him the true gospel. As a Jew, and the apostle to Gentile people, Paul was uniquely qualified to address this issue. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You are turning so quickly to a different gospel”

The Book of Galatians is one of Paul’s earliest letters in Scripture. It shows that heresies troubled even the early church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 1 1 m4ss figs-you 0 General Information: Paul, an apostle, writes this letter to the churches in the area of Galatia. Unless noted otherwise, all instances of “you” and “your” in this letter refer to the Galatians and are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) GAL 1 1 d1kd τοῦ ἐγείραντος αὐτὸν 1 the one who raised him “the one who caused him to live again” GAL 1 2 d737 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women, since all believers in Christ are members of one spiritual family, with God as their heavenly Father. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ GAL 1 20 h3cb figs-litotes ἃ δὲ γράφω ὑμῖν, ἰδοὺ, ἐνώ GAL 1 21 m25a κλίματα τῆς Συρίας 1 regions of Syria “part of the world called Syria” GAL 1 22 y6l4 ἤμην δὲ ἀγνοούμενος τῷ προσώπῳ ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ταῖς ἐν Χριστῷ 1 But I was unknown by face to the churches of Judea that are in Christ “None of the people in the churches of Judea that are in Christ had ever met me” GAL 1 23 z8qt μόνον δὲ ἀκούοντες ἦσαν 1 But they were only hearing “But they only knew what they heard others saying about me” -GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Freedom and slavery

Throughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “I do not negate the grace of God”

Paul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +GAL 2 intro xe28 0 # Galatians 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues to defend the true gospel. This began in [Galatians 1:11](../../gal/01/11.md).

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Freedom and slavery

Throughout this letter, Paul contrasts freedom and slavery. The Christian is free in Christ to do many different things. But the Christian who attempts to follow the law of Moses needs to follow the whole law. Paul describes trying to follow the law as a type of slavery. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “I do not negate the grace of God”

Paul teaches that, if a Christian attempts to follow the law of Moses, they do not understand the grace God has shown to them. This is a fundamental error. But Paul uses the words “I do not negate the grace of God” as a type of hypothetical situation. The purpose of this statement could be seen as, “If you could be saved by following the law, then it would negate the grace of God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 1 zt61 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to give the history of how he learned the gospel from God, not the apostles. GAL 2 1 zth5 ἀνέβην 1 I went up “I traveled.” Jerusalem is located in hilly country. The Jews also viewed Jerusalem as the place on earth that is closest to heaven, so Paul may have been speaking figuratively, or it may be that it was reflecting the difficult, uphill, journey to get to Jerusalem. GAL 2 2 msv4 τοῖς δοκοῦσιν 1 to those who seemed to be important “to the most important leaders among the believers” @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ GAL 2 21 tj6l figs-litotes οὐκ ἀθετῶ 1 I do not set aside Paul states GAL 2 21 yl3c figs-hypo εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη, ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 if righteousness is through the law, then Christ died for nothing Paul is describing a situation that never existed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) GAL 2 21 k6bg εἰ…διὰ νόμου δικαιοσύνη 1 if righteousness is through the law “if people could become righteous by obeying the law” GAL 2 21 rku5 ἄρα Χριστὸς δωρεὰν ἀπέθανεν 1 then Christ died for nothing “then Christ would have accomplished nothing by dying” -GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ

All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”

Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +GAL 3 intro xd92 0 # Galatians 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Equality in Christ

All Christians are equally united to Christ. Ancestry, gender, and status do not matter. All are equal with each other. All are equal in the eyes of God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Paul uses many different rhetorical questions in this chapter. He uses them to convince the Galatians of their sin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. “Flesh” is used in this chapter to contrast with that which is spiritual. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### “Those of faith are children of Abraham”

Scholars are divided on what this means. Some believe Christians inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham, so Christians replace the physical descendants of Israel. Others believe Christians spiritually follow Abraham, but they do not inherit the promises that God gave to Abraham. In light of Paul’s other teachings and the context here, Paul is probably writing about the Jewish and Gentile Christians sharing the same faith as Abraham did. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 3 1 p7uw 0 General Information: Paul is rebuking the Galatians by asking rhetorical questions. GAL 3 1 x4gd 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers in Galatia that God gave them God’s Spirit when they believed the gospel by faith, not by their doing God’s law. GAL 3 1 ryu7 figs-irony τίς ὑμᾶς ἐβάσκανεν, οἷς κατ’ ὀφθαλμοὺς Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς προεγράφη ἐσταυρωμένος? 1 Who bewitched you, before whose eyes Jesus Christ was publicly portrayed as crucified? Paul is using irony. He does not really believe that someone has put a spell on the Galatians. Alternate translation: “Why are you behaving as if someone has put a spell on you, even though it was clearly described to you how Jesus Christ was crucified?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) @@ -154,7 +154,7 @@ GAL 3 27 v6n1 ὅσοι γὰρ εἰς Χριστὸν ἐβαπτίσθητε GAL 3 27 di9v figs-metaphor Χριστὸν ἐνεδύσασθε 1 have put on Christ This could mean: (1) This is a metaphor meaning that they have been united to Christ. Alternate translation: “have become united with Christ” or “belong to Christ” (2) This is a metaphor meaning that they have become like Christ. Alternate translation: “have become like Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 3 28 tyb8 οὐκ ἔνι Ἰουδαῖος οὐδὲ Ἕλλην, οὐκ ἔνι δοῦλος οὐδὲ ἐλεύθερος, οὐκ ἔνι ἄρσεν καὶ θῆλυ 1 There is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither slave nor free, there is neither male nor female “God sees no difference between Jew and Greek, slave and free, male and female” GAL 3 29 qp4z figs-metaphor κληρονόμοι 1 heirs The people to whom God has made promises are spoken of as if they were to inherit property and wealth from a family member. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -GAL 4 intro h6gw 0 # Galatians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sonship

Sonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel’s sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham’s physical descendants inherited God’s promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them “children of promise.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Abba, Father

“Abba” is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul “transliterates” its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) +GAL 4 intro h6gw 0 # Galatians 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 27, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sonship

Sonship is a complex issue. Scholars have many views on Israel’s sonship. Paul uses sonship to teach how being under the law differs from being free in Christ. Not all of Abraham’s physical descendants inherited God’s promises to him. Only his descendants through Isaac and Jacob inherited the promises. And God only adopts into his family those who follow Abraham spiritually through faith. They are children of God with an inheritance. Paul calls them “children of promise.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/adoption]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Abba, Father

“Abba” is an Aramaic word. In ancient Israel, people used it to informally refer to their fathers. Paul “transliterates” its sounds by writing them with Greek letters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) GAL 4 1 fr5u 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to remind the Galatian believers that Christ came to redeem those who were under the law, and that he made them no more slaves but sons. GAL 4 1 n5yb οὐδὲν διαφέρει 1 he is no different from “he is the same as” GAL 4 2 bd5a ἐπιτρόπους 1 guardians people with legal responsibility for children @@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ GAL 4 29 c9lf figs-metaphor κατὰ σάρκα 1 according to the flesh This r GAL 4 29 gt1e κατὰ Πνεῦμα 1 according to the Spirit “because of something the Spirit did” GAL 4 31 sy8u ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md). GAL 4 31 y3c2 figs-ellipsis ἀλλὰ τῆς ἐλευθέρας 1 but of the free woman The words “we are children” are understood from the previous phrase. You can translate this as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “rather, we are children of the free woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -GAL 5 intro bcg3 0 # Galatians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fruit of the Spirit

The phrase “the fruit of the Spirit” is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. Translators should keep the singular form if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Illustrations

Paul uses several metaphors in this chapter to illustrate his points and help explain complicated issues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You are cut off from Christ, you who would be justified by the law; you no longer experience grace.”

Some scholars think Paul teaches that being circumcised causes a person to lose their salvation. Other scholars think Paul means that obeying the law to try to get right with God will keep a person from being saved by grace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]]) +GAL 5 intro bcg3 0 # Galatians 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul continues writing about the law of Moses as something that traps or enslaves a person. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fruit of the Spirit

The phrase “the fruit of the Spirit” is not plural, even though it begins a list of several things. Translators should keep the singular form if possible. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Illustrations

Paul uses several metaphors in this chapter to illustrate his points and help explain complicated issues. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You are cut off from Christ, you who would be justified by the law; you no longer experience grace.”

Some scholars think Paul teaches that being circumcised causes a person to lose their salvation. Other scholars think Paul means that obeying the law to try to get right with God will keep a person from being saved by grace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]]) GAL 5 1 up16 0 Connecting Statement: Paul applies the allegory by reminding the believers to use their liberty in Christ because all the law is fulfilled in loving neighbors as ourselves. GAL 5 1 kuu9 figs-explicit τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν 1 For freedom Christ has set us free “It is so that we can be free that Christ has set us free.” It is implied that **Christ** sets believers **free** from the old covenant. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) GAL 5 1 xd2m figs-metaphor τῇ ἐλευθερίᾳ, ἡμᾶς Χριστὸς ἠλευθέρωσεν 1 For freedom Christ has set us free Here, **freedom** from the old covenant is a metaphor for not being obligated to obey it. Alternate translation: “Christ has set us free from the old covenant so that we might be free” or “Christ has set us free so that we might live as free people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -277,7 +277,7 @@ GAL 5 24 m3nm figs-personification τὴν σάρκα…σὺν τοῖς παθ GAL 5 25 h9hd εἰ ζῶμεν Πνεύματι 1 If we live by the Spirit “Since God’s Spirit has caused us to be alive” GAL 5 25 sq7b figs-metaphor Πνεύματι καὶ στοιχῶμεν 1 let us also walk by the Spirit Here, **walk** is a metaphor for living every day. Alternate translation: “let us allow the Holy Spirit to guide us so we do things that please and honor God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) GAL 5 26 a9x9 μὴ γινώμεθα 1 Let us not become “We should not be” -GAL 6 intro bv8h 0 # Galatians 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter concludes Paul’s letter. His final words address some issues that do not seem to be connected to the rest of his letter.

### Brothers

Paul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them “brothers.” This refers to Paul’s Christian brothers and not his Jewish brothers.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New Creation

People who are born again are a new creation in Christ. Christians have been given new life in Christ. They have a new nature in them after they come to faith in Christ. To Paul, this is more significant than a person’s ancestry. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is contrasted with “spirit.” In this chapter, flesh is also used to refer to the physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) +GAL 6 intro bv8h 0 # Galatians 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter concludes Paul’s letter. His final words address some issues that do not seem to be connected to the rest of his letter.

### Brothers

Paul writes the words in this chapter to Christians. He calls them “brothers.” This refers to Paul’s Christian brothers and not his Jewish brothers.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New Creation

People who are born again are a new creation in Christ. Christians have been given new life in Christ. They have a new nature in them after they come to faith in Christ. To Paul, this is more significant than a person’s ancestry. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/bornagain]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is contrasted with “spirit.” In this chapter, flesh is also used to refer to the physical body. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]]) GAL 6 1 x8zg 0 Connecting Statement: Paul teaches believers how they should treat other believers and how God rewards. GAL 6 1 ss7l ἀδελφοί 1 Brothers See how you translated this in [Galatians 1:2](../01/02.md). GAL 6 1 vm8f ἐὰν…ἄνθρωπος 1 if a man “if anyone among you” diff --git a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv index b9c86fbf2d..0827ff8f34 100644 --- a/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_50-EPH.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote EPH front intro e3di 0 # Introduction to Ephesians


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Ephesians

1. Greeting and prayer for the spiritual blessings in Christ (1:1-23)
1. Sin and salvation (2:1-10)
1. Unity and peace (2:11-22)
1. Mystery of Christ in the believers, made known (3:1-13)
1. Prayer for riches of his glory to make the believers strong (3:14-21)
1. Unity of the Spirit, building up the Body of Christ (4:1-16)
1. New life (4:17-32)
1. Imitators of God (5:1-21)
1. 1 Wives and husbands; children and parents; slaves and masters (5:22-6:9)
11. Armor of God (6:10-20)
1. Final greeting (6:21-24)

### Who wrote the Book of Ephesians?

Paul wrote Ephesians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

The Apostle Paul helped start the church in Ephesus on one of his trips. He also lived in Ephesus for a year and a half and helped the believers there. Paul probably wrote this letter while he was in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Ephesians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Ephesus to explain God’s love for them in Christ Jesus. He described the blessings that God was giving them because they were now united with Christ. He explained that all believers are united together, whether Jew or Gentile. Paul also wanted to encourage them to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Ephesians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Ephesus” or “A Letter to the Christians in Ephesus.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the “mystery” in the book of Ephesians?

The expression translated in the ULT as “mystery” or “hidden” occurs six times. By it, Paul always meant something that God had to reveal to human beings because they could not know it on their own. It always referred to something about how God planned to save mankind. Sometimes it was about his plan to bring about peace between himself and mankind. Sometimes it was more specifically about his plan to save both Jews and Gentiles by uniting them through Christ. This hidden truth was that Gentiles are now able to benefit from the promises of Christ as equals with the Jews.

### What did Paul say about salvation and righteous living?

Paul said much about salvation and righteous living in this letter and in many of his letters. He said that God has been very kind and saved Christians because they believe in Jesus. Therefore, after they become Christians, they should live in a righteous way to show that they have faith in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers who may read this letter. The three exceptions to this are: 5:14, 6:2, and 6:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What did Paul mean by the “new self” or the “new man”?

When Paul spoke of the “new self” or the “new man,” he meant the new nature that a believer receives from the Holy Spirit. This new nature was created in God’s image (See: 4:24). The phrase “new man” is also used for God bringing about peace between Jews and Gentiles. God brought them together as one people group that belong to him (See: 2:15).

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Ephesians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of several ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the use of “holy” to express the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another use of “holy” is to express the idea that God is perfect and faultless. A third use is to express the idea that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “saints.” (See: 1:1, 4)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “saint” or “saints.”
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 3:5)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 15, 20; 2:6, 7, 10, 13, 15, 16, 18, 21, 22; 3:5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 21; 4:1, 17, 21, 32; 5:8, 18, 19; 6:1, 10, 18, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Ephesians?

* “in Ephesus” (1:1). Some of the earliest manuscripts do not include this phrase. It is likely that Paul intended this letter to be read in many churches, including Ephesus and many other cities. He may have originally left a blank space for the city name to be filled in by those copying the letter and carrying it to different cities. But “Ephesus” is the only name found on manuscripts that have a city name. Therefore, the ULT, UST, and many modern versions include it.
* “because we are members of his body” (5:30). Most modern versions, including the ULT and UST, read in this way. Some older versions read, “because we are members of his body and of his bones.” Translators might decide to choose the second reading if other versions in their area have it that way. If translators choose the second reading, they should put the additional words inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that they are probably not original to the book of Ephesians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Predestination

Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestine” in 1:5, 11. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]]) +EPH 1 intro fg42 0 # Ephesians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter like a prayer of praise to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is teaching the church in Ephesus. He also tells the Ephesians how he is praying for them.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Predestination

Many scholars believe this chapter teaches on a subject known as “predestination.” See the use of the word “predestine” in 1:5, 11. Some scholars take this to indicate that God has, from before the foundation of the world, chosen some people to save. Christians have different views on what the Bible teaches on this subject, so translators need to take extra care when translating this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/predestine]]) EPH 1 1 kx1g figs-you 0 General Information: Paul names himself as the writer of this letter to the believers in the church at Ephesus (and elsewhere). Except where noted, all instances of “you” and “your” refer to the Ephesian believers as well as to all believers, and so are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EPH 1 1 ilf2 Παῦλος, ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ…τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῖς οὖσιν 1 Paul, an apostle of Christ Jesus … to the saints who are Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and the intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ … write this letter to you, God’s holy people” EPH 1 1 u73p figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in Christ Jesus The phrase **in Christ Jesus** and similar expressions are metaphors that frequently occur in the New Testament letters. They express the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him, picturing believers as being surrounded by Christ. Alternate Translation: “in close relationship to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ EPH 1 22 pm4t figs-metaphor κεφαλὴν ὑπὲρ πάντα 1 head over al EPH 1 23 ge2c figs-metaphor τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ 1 his body Just as the head (verse 22) rules all things pertaining to a human body, so Christ is the head of the church body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 1 23 w2kh τὸ πλήρωμα τοῦ τὰ πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν πληρουμένου 1 the fullness of the one who fills all in all “for Christ fills the church with his life and power just as he gives life to all things” EPH 1 23 x2kh τὸ πλήρωμα 1 the fullness This could mean: (1) It has a passive sense, which would mean that Christ fills or completes the church. (2) It has an active sense, which would mean that the church completes Christ (as a body completes a head). -EPH 2 intro e7qn 0 # Ephesians 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter focuses on the life that a Christian had before coming to believe in Jesus. Paul then uses this information to explain how a person’s former way of living is distinct from a Christian’s new identity “in Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### One body

Paul teaches about the church in this chapter. The church is made of two different groups of people (Jews and Gentiles). They are now one group or “body.” The church is also known as the body of Christ. Jews and Gentiles are united in Christ.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “Dead in trespasses and sins”

Paul teaches that those who are not Christians are “dead” in their sin. Sin binds or enslaves them. This makes them spiritually “dead.” Paul writes that God makes Christians alive in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Descriptions of worldly living

Paul uses many different ways to describe how non-Christians act. They “lived according to the ways of this world” and are “living according to the ruler of the authorities of the air,” “fulfilling the evil desires of our sinful nature,” and “carrying out the desires of the body and of the mind.”

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “It is the gift of God”

Some scholars believe “it” here refers to being saved. Other scholars believe that it is faith that is the gift of God. Because of how the Greek tenses agree, “it” here probably refers to both things: the gift is that we are saved by God’s grace through faith.

### Flesh

“Flesh” is sometimes used as a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. The phrase “Gentiles in the flesh” indicates the Ephesians once lived without any concern for God. But “flesh” is also used in this verse to refer to the physical person, similar to “body part of man.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) +EPH 2 intro e7qn 0 # Ephesians 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter focuses on the life that a Christian had before coming to believe in Jesus. Paul then uses this information to explain how a person’s former way of living is distinct from a Christian’s new identity “in Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### One body

Paul teaches about the church in this chapter. The church is made of two different groups of people (Jews and Gentiles). They are now one group or “body.” The church is also known as the body of Christ. Jews and Gentiles are united in Christ.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “Dead in trespasses and sins”

Paul teaches that those who are not Christians are “dead” in their sin. Sin binds or enslaves them. This makes them spiritually “dead.” Paul writes that God makes Christians alive in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Descriptions of worldly living

Paul uses many different ways to describe how non-Christians act. They “lived according to the ways of this world” and are “living according to the ruler of the authorities of the air,” “fulfilling the evil desires of our sinful nature,” and “carrying out the desires of the body and of the mind.”

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “It is the gift of God”

Some scholars believe “it” here refers to being saved. Other scholars believe that it is faith that is the gift of God. Because of how the Greek tenses agree, “it” here probably refers to both things: the gift is that we are saved by God’s grace through faith.

### Flesh

“Flesh” is sometimes used as a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. The phrase “Gentiles in the flesh” indicates the Ephesians once lived without any concern for God. But “flesh” is also used in this verse to refer to the physical person, similar to “body part of man.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]]) EPH 2 1 xf5s 0 Connecting Statement: Paul reminds the believers of their past and the way they now are before God. EPH 2 1 dxx8 figs-metaphor ὑμᾶς ὄντας νεκροὺς τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν 1 you were dead in your trespasses and sins This shows how the inability of a sinful person to obey God is similar to a dead person’s inability to respond physically. Alternate translation: “you were spiritually dead, unable to do anything but sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 2 1 lp32 figs-doublet τοῖς παραπτώμασιν καὶ ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν 1 in your trespasses and sins The words **trespasses** and **sins** have similar meanings. Paul uses them together to emphasize the greatness of the people’s sin. If your language has just one word for this, the two words can be combined. Alternate translation: “your many sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -153,7 +153,7 @@ EPH 2 21 ljt5 figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ…ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 In whom … in the L EPH 2 22 u55j figs-metaphor ἐν ᾧ 1 in whom You can translate this as “in Christ,” which is a metaphor that expresses the strongest kind of relationship possible between Christ and those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 2 22 b4c8 figs-metaphor καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε, εἰς κατοικητήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐν Πνεύματι 1 you also are being built together as a dwelling place for God in the Spirit This describes how believers are being put together to become a **place** where **God** will permanently live through the power of the Holy **Spirit**. Alternate translation: “you also are being joined to this group where God lives by his Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 2 22 e52h figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς συνοικοδομεῖσθε 1 you also are being built together You can state this as active. Alternate translation: “God is also building you together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EPH 3 intro gha7 0 # Ephesians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter as a prayer to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is both praying for and instructing the church in Ephesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Mystery

Paul refers to the church as a “mystery.” The role of the church in the plans of God was once not known. But God has now revealed it. Part of this mystery involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. +EPH 3 intro gha7 0 # Ephesians 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

### “I pray”

Paul structures part of this chapter as a prayer to God. But Paul is not just talking to God. He is both praying for and instructing the church in Ephesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Mystery

Paul refers to the church as a “mystery.” The role of the church in the plans of God was once not known. But God has now revealed it. Part of this mystery involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. EPH 3 1 w896 0 Connecting Statement: To make clear the hidden truth about the church to believers, Paul refers back to the oneness of Jews and Gentiles and how believers from both groups form part of the one group that worships God, like the stones that form one temple. EPH 3 1 jb9u grammar-connect-logic-result τούτου χάριν 1 For this reason The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is what Paul talked about in Chapter 2, that Christ showed his grace by removing the division between Jews and Gentiles and making them into one group. The result is that Paul prays for the Gentiles. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EPH 3 1 abd6 figs-explicit τούτου χάριν 1 For this reason You may need to make explicit what the reason is. Alternate translation: “because of God’s grace to you” You may also need to make explicit here what the result is, as in the UST, because Paul does not state the result until 3:14, that he prays for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -210,7 +210,7 @@ EPH 3 20 m7gi 0 Connecting Statement: Paul concludes his prayer with a blessin EPH 3 20 zxj3 τῷ δὲ 1 And to him “Now to God, who” EPH 3 20 zxt3 ποιῆσαι ὑπέρ ἐκ περισσοῦ ὧν αἰτούμεθα ἢ νοοῦμεν 1 to do exceedingly abundantly above all that we ask or think “to do much more than all that we ask or think” or “to do things that are much greater than anything that we ask him for or think about” EPH 3 21 ab12 figs-abstractnouns αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 to him be the glory in the church The word **glory** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “may God’s people glorify him” or “may God’s people praise him for how great he is” See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EPH 4 intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual gifts

Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Unity

Paul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Old man and new man

The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. +EPH 4 intro ang8 0 # Ephesians 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 8, which is quoted from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual gifts

Spiritual gifts are specific supernatural abilities that the Holy Spirit gives to Christians after they come to believe in Jesus. These spiritual gifts were foundational to developing the church. Paul lists here only some of the spiritual gifts. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

### Unity

Paul considers it very important that the church is united. This is a major theme of this chapter.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Old man and new man

The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. EPH 4 1 sb64 0 Connecting Statement: Because of what Paul has been writing to the Ephesians, he tells them how they should live their lives as believers and again emphasizes that believers are to agree with each other. EPH 4 1 abda grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason is that God will be glorified in the church for all generations. The result is that believers should walk in a way that is worthy of the Lord. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EPH 4 1 uss5 ὁ δέσμιος ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 the prisoner for the Lord “someone who is in prison because he serves the Lord” @@ -309,7 +309,7 @@ EPH 4 31 t1gj figs-abstractnouns πικρία, καὶ θυμὸς, καὶ ὀ EPH 4 31 abgj figs-abstractnouns κακίᾳ 1 malice The word **malice** is an abstract noun that can be expressed as an adjective. Alternate translation: “being malicious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EPH 4 32 abdo grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 Instead The connecting word **Instead** introduces a contrast relationship. Speaking angry and hurtful things is in contrast to speaking kind and tender things to one another. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EPH 4 32 w7tk εὔσπλαγχνοι 1 tenderhearted “gentle and compassionate towards others” -EPH 5 intro tdd2 0 # Ephesians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 14.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Inheritance of the kingdom of Christ

Some scholars believe that those who continue to practice the things listed in 5:5 will not inherit eternal life. But God can forgive all the sins listed in this verse. Immoral, impure, or greedy people can still receive eternal life if they repent and believe in Jesus. God will be the one who decides this. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Wives, submit to your husbands

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they interpret this issue affect how they translate this passage. +EPH 5 intro tdd2 0 # Ephesians 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 14.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Inheritance of the kingdom of Christ

Some scholars believe that those who continue to practice the things listed in 5:5 will not inherit eternal life. But God can forgive all the sins listed in this verse. Immoral, impure, or greedy people can still receive eternal life if they repent and believe in Jesus. God will be the one who decides this. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/life]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inherit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Wives, submit to your husbands

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they interpret this issue affect how they translate this passage. EPH 5 1 wus5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to tell the believers how they should and should not live as God’s children. EPH 5 1 jx2q γίνεσθε οὖν μιμηταὶ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Therefore, be imitators of God The word **imitators** is a verbal noun, and can be translated with a verb. Alternate translation: “Therefore, imitate God” or “Therefore you should do what God does.” EPH 5 1 abdp grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore The connecting word **Therefore** introduces a reason-result relationship. The reason (stated in [Ephesians 4:32](../04/32.md)) is that God has forgiven us through Christ. The result (stated here) is that believers should imitate what God is like. Use a phrase in your language that connects a reason to a result. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ EPH 5 30 h44f figs-metaphor μέλη ἐσμὲν τοῦ σώματος αὐτ EPH 5 31 yp23 0 General Information: The quotation is from the writings of Moses in the Old Testament. EPH 5 31 yp24 0 General Information: The words **his** and **himself** refer to a male believer who marries. EPH 5 31 abef grammar-connect-logic-result ἀντὶ τούτου 1 For this reason The connecting phrase **For this reason** introduces the result of a reason-result relationship. In this case, this phrase is part of a quotation from Genesis 2:24 and so the reason is not stated here, but it is stated in Genesis 2:23 that woman was created out of man. The result is that a man will leave his father and mother and be joined to his wife. If it is confusing to not state the reason, you can include a footnote that says, “the reason for this is that woman was created out of man. See Genesis 2:23” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EPH 6 intro r7c3 0 # Ephesians 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about working to please God whether as a slave or as a master. What Paul teaches here about slavery would have been surprising. In his time, masters were not expected to treat their slaves with respect and not threaten them.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Armor of God

This extended metaphor describes how Christians can protect themselves when spiritually attacked. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EPH 6 intro r7c3 0 # Ephesians 6 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches about working to please God whether as a slave or as a master. What Paul teaches here about slavery would have been surprising. In his time, masters were not expected to treat their slaves with respect and not threaten them.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Armor of God

This extended metaphor describes how Christians can protect themselves when spiritually attacked. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EPH 6 1 wq46 figs-you 0 General Information: The command in verse one is plural. Then in verses two and three Paul quotes from the law of Moses. Moses was talking to the people of Israel as though they were one person, so **your** and **you** are singular there. If that does not make sense, you may need to translate them as plurals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EPH 6 1 jf17 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to explain how Christians are to submit themselves to each other. He gives instructions to children, fathers, workers, and masters. EPH 6 1 ev8m ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 in the Lord “because you belong to the Lord” or “as followers of the Lord” diff --git a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv index 705f300ffe..ec172574c0 100644 --- a/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv +++ b/en_tn_51-PHP.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote PHP front intro pv9j 0 # Introduction to Philippians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of the Philippians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving and prayer (1:1-11)
1. Paul’s report on his ministry (1:12-26)
1. Instructions
- To be steadfast (1:27-30)
- To be united (2:1-2)
- To be humble (2:3-11)
- To work out our salvation with God working in you (2:12-13)
- To be innocent and light (2:14-18)
1. Timothy and Epaphroditus (2:19-30)
1. Warning about false teachers (3:1-4:1)
1. Personal instruction (4:2-5)
1. Rejoice and do not be anxious (4:4-6)
1. Final remarks
- Values (4:8-9)
- Contentment (4:10-20)
- Final Greetings (4:21-23)

### Who wrote the Book Philippians?

Paul wrote Philippians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Philippians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in Philippi, a city in Macedonia. He wrote it to thank the Philippians for the gift they had sent him. He wanted to tell them about how he was doing in prison and to encourage them to rejoice even if they are suffering. He also wrote to them about a man named Epaphroditus. He was the one who brought the gift to Paul. While visiting Paul, Epaphroditus became ill. So, Paul decided to send him back to Philippi. Paul encouraged the believers in Philippi to welcome and to be kind to Epaphroditus when he returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Philippians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Philippi,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Philippi.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Philippi like?

Philip, the father of Alexander the Great, founded Philippi in the region of Macedonia. This meant that the citizens of Philippi were also considered citizens of Rome. The people of Philippi were proud of being citizens of Rome. But Paul told the believers that they are citizens of heaven (3:20).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. The word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Philippi. The exception to this is 4:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Who were the “enemies of the cross of Christ” (3:18) in this letter?

The “enemies of the cross of Christ” were probably people who called themselves believers, but they did not obey God’s commands. They thought that freedom in Christ meant that believers could do whatever they desired and God would not punish them (3:19).

### Why were the words “joy” and “rejoice” frequently used in this letter?

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter (1:7). Even though he suffered, Paul said many times that he was joyful because God had been kind to him through Jesus Christ. He wanted to encourage his readers to have the same trust in Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])

### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:1, 8, 13, 14, 26, 27; 2:1, 5, 19, 24, 29; 3:1, 3, 9, 14; 4:1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 13, 19, 21. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Philippians?

Some versions have “Amen” at the end of the final verse in the letter (4:23). The ULT, UST, and other many modern versions do not. If “Amen” is included, it should be put inside square brackets ([]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Philippians.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The day of Christ

This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md)) +PHP 1 intro kd3g 0 # Philippians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul includes a prayer in the beginning of this letter. At that time, religious leaders sometimes began informal letters with a prayer.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The day of Christ

This probably refers to the day when Christ returns. Paul often connected the return of Christ with motivating godly living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This statement in verse 21 is a paradox: “to die is gain.” In verse 23 Paul explains why this is true. ([Philippians 1:21](../../php/01/21.md)) PHP 1 1 xk9z translate-names Παῦλος καὶ Τιμόθεος 1 Paul and Timothy These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) PHP 1 2 uuep translate-names χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace to you and peace This is a common greeting and blessing that Paul often uses in the beginning of his letters. Use a form in your language that makes it clear that this is a greeting and blessing. PHP 1 3 ntp5 ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν 1 in all my remembrance of you Here, **in all my remembrance of you** could mean: (1) Paul thanked God each time that he thought about the Philippian Christians. Alternate translation: “whenever I think about you” (2) Paul thanked God for the good things that he remembered about the Philippian Christians. Alternate translation: “because of all that I remember about you” @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ PHP 1 28 i9yt figs-you μὴ πτυρόμενοι ἐν μηδενὶ 1 do not b PHP 1 28 l495 ἥτις ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἔνδειξις ἀπωλείας, ὑμῶν δὲ σωτηρίας, καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 This is a sign to them of their destruction, but of your salvation—and this from God “Your courage will show them that God will destroy them. It will also show you that God will save you” PHP 1 28 nb4b καὶ τοῦτο ἀπὸ Θεοῦ 1 and this from God “and this is from God.” Here, **this** could mean: (1) This refers to the believers’ courage. (2) This refers to the sign. (3) This refers to destruction and salvation. PHP 1 30 x4z3 τὸν αὐτὸν ἀγῶνα ἔχοντες, οἷον εἴδετε ἐν ἐμοὶ, καὶ νῦν ἀκούετε ἐν ἐμοί 1 having the same struggle which you saw in me, and now you hear in me “suffering in the same way that you saw me suffer, and that you now hear that I am still suffering” -PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Practical instructions

In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “If there is any”

This appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.” +PHP 2 intro ixw8 0 # Philippians 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations, like the ULT, set apart the lines of verses 6-11. These verses describe the example of Christ. They teach important truths about the person of Jesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Practical instructions

In this chapter Paul gives many practical instructions to the church in Philippi.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “If there is any”

This appears to be a type of hypothetical statement. However, it is not a hypothetical statement, because it expresses something that is true. The translator may also translate this phrase as “Since there is.” PHP 2 1 xye5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul advises the believers to have unity and humility and reminds them of Christ’s example. PHP 2 1 b1q7 εἴ τις…παράκλησις ἐν Χριστῷ 1 If there is any encouragement in Christ “if Christ has encouraged you” or “if you are encouraged because of Christ” PHP 2 1 k1b2 εἴ τι παραμύθιον ἀγάπης 1 if any comfort of love Here, **love** probably refers to Christ’s love for the Philippians. Alternate translation: “if his love has given you any comfort” or “if his love for you has comforted you in any way” @@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ PHP 2 29 y95x προσδέχεσθε οὖν αὐτὸν 1 Therefore welcome h PHP 2 29 qx14 ἐν Κυρίῳ μετὰ πάσης χαρᾶς 1 in the Lord with all joy “as a fellow believer in the Lord with all joy” or “with the great joy we have because the Lord Jesus loves us” PHP 2 30 ns1y figs-metaphor μέχρι θανάτου ἤγγισεν 1 he came near even to death Paul here speaks of **death** as if it were a place that one could go to. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) PHP 2 30 g98z figs-metaphor ἀναπληρώσῃ τὸ ὑμῶν ὑστέρημα, τῆς πρός με λειτουργίας 1 he might make up your lack of service to me Paul speaks of his needs as if they were a container that Epaphroditus filled with good things for Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 4-8, Paul lists how he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew. But he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dogs

The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.

### Resurrected Bodies

We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prize

Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is attempting to grow to be like Christ until a person dies. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it. +PHP 3 intro btx3 0 # Philippians 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 4-8, Paul lists how he qualifies for being considered a righteous Jew. In every way, Paul was an exemplary Jew. But he contrasts this with the greatness of knowing Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Dogs

The people of the ancient Near East used dogs as an image to refer to people in a negative way. Not all cultures use the term “dogs” in this way.

### Resurrected Bodies

We know very little about what people will be like in heaven. Paul teaches here that Christians will have some kind of glorious body and will be free from sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Prize

Paul uses an extended illustration to describe the Christian life. The goal of the Christian life is attempting to grow to be like Christ until a person dies. We can never achieve this goal perfectly, but we must strive for it. PHP 3 1 e79h 0 Connecting Statement: In order to warn his fellow believers about Jews who would try to get them to follow the old laws, Paul gives his own testimony about when he persecuted believers. PHP 3 1 s3bx τὸ λοιπόν, ἀδελφοί μου 1 As to the rest, my brothers “Now moving along, my brothers” or “Concerning other matters, my brothers” PHP 3 1 zu9l ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated this in [Philippians 1:12](../01/12.md). @@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ PHP 3 20 n2lh ἡμῶν…τὸ πολίτευμα ἐν οὐρανοῖς PHP 3 21 eye2 ὃς μετασχηματίσει τὸ σῶμα τῆς ταπεινώσεως ἡμῶν 1 who will transform our lowly body “who will change our weak, earthly body” PHP 3 21 b2bc σύμμορφον τῷ σώματι τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ 1 to confirmity to his glorious body “into a body like his glorious body” PHP 3 21 qz6p figs-activepassive τῷ σώματι τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ, κατὰ τὴν ἐνέργειαν τοῦ δύνασθαι αὐτὸν, καὶ ὑποτάξαι αὑτῷ τὰ πάντα 1 to his glorious body, according to the working of his power even to subject all things to himself You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to his glorious body. He will change our bodies with the same power he uses to control all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -PHP 4 intro rp5c 0 # Philippians 04 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My joy and my crown”

Paul had helped the Philippians become spiritually mature. As a result, Paul rejoiced and God honored him and his work. He considered discipling other Christians and encouraging them to grow spiritually as important to Christian living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Euodia and Syntyche

Apparently, these two women disagreed with each other. Paul was encouraging them to agree. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +PHP 4 intro rp5c 0 # Philippians 4 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My joy and my crown”

Paul had helped the Philippians become spiritually mature. As a result, Paul rejoiced and God honored him and his work. He considered discipling other Christians and encouraging them to grow spiritually as important to Christian living. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Euodia and Syntyche

Apparently, these two women disagreed with each other. Paul was encouraging them to agree. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) PHP 4 1 zk6q figs-you 0 General Information: When Paul says, “my true companion,” The word **you** is singular. Paul does not say the name of the person. He calls him that to show he worked with Paul to spread the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) PHP 4 1 xmc4 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues with some specific instructions to the believers in Philippi on unity and then gives instructions to help them live for the Lord. PHP 4 1 fe2y ἀδελφοί μου ἀγαπητοὶ καὶ ἐπιπόθητοι 1 my brothers, beloved and longed for “my fellow believers, I love you and I greatly desire to see you” diff --git a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv index 9ea88c58b6..5ff04f826f 100644 --- a/en_tn_52-COL.tsv +++ b/en_tn_52-COL.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote COL front intro d9hy 0 # Introduction to Colossians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Colossians

1. Greeting, thanksgiving, and prayer (1:1-12)
1. The person and work of Christ
- Deliverance and redemption (1:13-14)
- Christ: the Image of the invisible God, and the One who is over all creation (1:15-17)
- Christ is the Head of the Church, and the Church trusts in him (1:18-2:7)
1. Tests of faithfulness
- Warnings against false teachers (2:8-19)
- True godliness is not rigid rules and unbending traditions (2:20-23)
1. Teaching and living
- Life in Christ (3:1-4)
- Old and new life (3:5-17)
- Christian family (3:18-4:1)
1. Christian behavior (4:2-6)
1. Closing and greetings
- Paul thanks Tychicus and Onesimus (4:7-9)
- Paul sends greetings from his associates (4:10-14)
- Paul gives directions to Archippus and the Christians in Laodicea (4:15-17)
- Paul’s personal greeting (4:18)

### Who wrote the Book of Colossians?

Paul wrote the Book of Colossians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome.

### What is the Book of Colossians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the Asia Minor city of Colossae. The main purpose of this letter was to defend the gospel against false teachers. He did this by praising Jesus as the image of God, sustainer of all things, and head of the church. Paul wanted them to understand that only Christ is needed for God to accept them.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Colossians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Colossae,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Colossae.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What were the religious issues that the church in Colossae struggled with?

In the church in Colossae, there were false teachers. Their exact teaching is unknown. But they probably taught their followers to worship angels and to obey strict rules about religious ceremonies. They probably also taught that a person must be circumcised and can only eat certain types of food. Paul said these false teachings came from the minds of men and not from God.

### How did Paul use the imagery of heaven and earth?

In this letter, Paul frequently spoke of heaven as “above.” He distinguished it from the earth, which Scripture speaks of as being “below.” The purpose of this imagery was to teach Christians to live in a way that honors God who lives in heaven above. Paul is not teaching that the earth or the physical world is evil. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Colossians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In Colossians, these words usually indicate a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. So Colossians in the ULT uses “believers” or “those who believe in him.” (See: 1:2, 12, 26)

### Was Jesus created or is he eternal?

Jesus was not a created being but has always existed as God. Jesus also became a human being. There is potential for confusion in Colossians 1:15 where it says Jesus “is the firstborn of all creation.” This statement means that Jesus is dominant over all of creation. It does not mean that he was the first thing God created. Translators should be careful not to imply that Jesus is a created being.

### What does Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. See the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Colossians?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “May grace be to you, and peace from God our Father” (1:2). Some older versions have a longer reading: “Grace to you and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, who is a faithful servant of Christ on our behalf” (1:7). Some older versions read “for you”: “Epaphras, our beloved fellow servant, a faithful servant of Christ for you.”
* “the Father, who has made you able to have a share in the inheritance of the believers in light” (1:12). Some older versions read, “the Father, who has qualified us for a share in the inheritance in light.”
* “In his Son we have redemption” (1:14). Some older versions read, “In his Son we have redemption through his blood.”
* “and forgave us all of our trespasses” (2:13). Some older versions read: “and forgave you all of your trespasses.”
* “When Christ appears, who is your life” (3:4). Some older versions read, “When Christ appears, who is our life.”
* “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming on the sons of disobedience” (3:6). The ULT, UST, and many other modern versions read this way. However, some modern and older versions read, “It is for these things that the wrath of God is coming.”
* “I sent him to you for this, that you might know the matters about us” (4:8). Some older versions read, “I sent him to you for this, that he might know the matters about you.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -COL 1 intro gtm3 0 # Colossians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

As in a typical letter, Paul begins his letter in verses 1-2 by introducing Timothy and himself to the Christians in Colossae.

Paul writes much of this chapter around two subjects: who Christ is, and what Christ has done for the Christian.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Images for Christian living

Paul uses many different images to describe Christian living. In this chapter, he uses the images of “walking” and “bearing fruit.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Verse 24 is a paradox: “Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you.” People do not usually rejoice when they suffer. But in verses 25-29 Paul explains why his suffering is good. ([Colossians 1:24](../../col/01/24.md)) +COL 1 intro gtm3 0 # Colossians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

As in a typical letter, Paul begins his letter in verses 1-2 by introducing Timothy and himself to the Christians in Colossae.

Paul writes much of this chapter around two subjects: who Christ is, and what Christ has done for the Christian.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Images for Christian living

Paul uses many different images to describe Christian living. In this chapter, he uses the images of “walking” and “bearing fruit.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Verse 24 is a paradox: “Now I rejoice in my sufferings for you.” People do not usually rejoice when they suffer. But in verses 25-29 Paul explains why his suffering is good. ([Colossians 1:24](../../col/01/24.md)) COL 1 1 h5gl 0 General Information: Though this letter is from Paul and Timothy to the Colossian believers, later in the letter Paul makes it clear that he is the writer. Most likely Timothy was with him and wrote the words down as Paul spoke. COL 1 1 nlf1 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Throughout this letter the words “we,” “our,” and “ours” include the Colossians unless noted otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) COL 1 1 bqvt figs-you 0 General Information: The words “you,” “your,” and “yours” refer to the Colossian believers and so are plural unless noted otherwise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ COL 1 28 va1x figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς καταγγέλλομεν…παρα COL 1 28 na8w νουθετοῦντες πάντα ἄνθρωπον 1 admonishing every man “warning everyone” COL 1 28 lyz1 figs-explicit ἵνα παραστήσωμεν πάντα ἄνθρωπον 1 so that we may present every man You may need to make explicit to whom they will present every person. Alternate translation: “so that we may present to God every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 1 28 uk2i figs-metaphor τέλειον 1 complete Being **complete** is a metaphor for being spiritually mature. Alternate translation: “spiritually mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -COL 2 intro p3uc 0 # Colossians 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Circumcision and baptism

In verses 11-12, Paul uses both the old covenant sign of circumcision and the new covenant sign of baptism to show how Christians are united with Christ and freed from sin.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that, while Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. Paul also uses “flesh” in this chapter to refer to the physical body.

### Implicit information

Paul mentions several issues in this chapter that imply information about the context of the church in Colossae. It is best to allow the text to remain uncertain over the actual details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +COL 2 intro p3uc 0 # Colossians 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Circumcision and baptism

In verses 11-12, Paul uses both the old covenant sign of circumcision and the new covenant sign of baptism to show how Christians are united with Christ and freed from sin.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Flesh

This is a complex issue. “Flesh” is possibly a metaphor for our sinful nature. Paul is not teaching that the physical part of man is sinful. Paul appears to be teaching that, while Christians are alive (“in the flesh”), we will continue to sin. But our new nature will be fighting against our old nature. Paul also uses “flesh” in this chapter to refer to the physical body.

### Implicit information

Paul mentions several issues in this chapter that imply information about the context of the church in Colossae. It is best to allow the text to remain uncertain over the actual details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) COL 2 1 tt6v 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to encourage the believers in Colossae and Laodicea to understand that Christ is God and that he lives in believers, so they should live in the same way they received him. COL 2 1 dqg5 ἡλίκον ἀγῶνα ἔχω ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 1 how great a struggle I have for you Paul has exerted much effort in developing their purity and understanding of the gospel. COL 2 1 fn4z τῶν ἐν Λαοδικίᾳ 1 those at Laodicea This was a city very close to Colossae where there was also a church for which Paul was praying. @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ COL 2 21 v9e7 0 Connecting Statement: The rhetorical question that begins with COL 2 21 b392 μὴ ἅψῃ! μηδὲ γεύσῃ! μηδὲ θίγῃς! 1 You may not handle, nor taste, nor touch! Paul is quoting what other people have been telling the Colossians. COL 2 23 y2dc ἅτινά…λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας ἐν ἐθελοθρησκείᾳ καὶ ταπεινοφροσύνῃ, ἀφειδίᾳ σώματος 1 These, having indeed a word of wisdom in self-made religion and false humility and severity of the body “These rules that seem wise to unbelieving people because they allow those who follow them to appear humble because they hurt their own bodies” COL 2 23 e7p5 ἐστιν…οὐκ ἐν τιμῇ τινι πρὸς πλησμονὴν τῆς σαρκός 1 are not of any value against the indulgence of the flesh “do not help you stop following your human desires” -COL 3 intro qtl2 0 # Colossians 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The second part of this chapter parallels Ephesians 5 and 6.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Old and new self

The old and new self mean the same as the old and new man. The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Character

Many of the things Paul encourages his readers to pursue or avoid are not actions but character qualities. Because of this, they may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### “The things above”

Where God dwells is often pictured as being located “above.” Paul says to “seek the things above” and to “think about the things above.” He is implying Christians should seek and think about heavenly and godly things. +COL 3 intro qtl2 0 # Colossians 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The second part of this chapter parallels Ephesians 5 and 6.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Old and new self

The old and new self mean the same as the old and new man. The term “old man” probably refers to the sinful nature with which a person is born. The “new man” is the new nature or new life that God gives a person after they come to believe in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Character

Many of the things Paul encourages his readers to pursue or avoid are not actions but character qualities. Because of this, they may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

### “The things above”

Where God dwells is often pictured as being located “above.” Paul says to “seek the things above” and to “think about the things above.” He is implying Christians should seek and think about heavenly and godly things. COL 3 1 ya97 0 Connecting Statement: Paul warns the believers that because they are one with Christ, they ought not do certain things. COL 3 1 r5yh figs-idiom εἰ οὖν 1 If, therefore This is an idiom that means “Because.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) COL 3 1 t1jv figs-idiom συνηγέρθητε τῷ Χριστῷ 1 you were raised with Christ Here to be **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. This could mean: (1) Because God has caused Christ to come alive again, God has already given the believers in Colossae new spiritual life. Alternate translation: “God has given you new life because you belong to Christ” (2) Because God has caused Christ to come alive again, the believers in Colossae can know that after they die they will live with Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -201,7 +201,7 @@ COL 3 24 p3pw figs-metaphor τῆς κληρονομίας 1 of the inheritance COL 3 25 u5lx ὁ…ἀδικῶν, κομιεῖται ὃ ἠδίκησεν 1 the one who does unrighteousness will receive what he did unrighteously The phrase **receive the what he did unrighteously** means to be punished for bad actions. Alternate translation: “anyone who does unrighteousness will be punished for those things” or “God will punish anyone who does what is unrighteous” COL 3 25 ak8j ἀδικῶν 1 doing unrighteousness actively doing wrong of any kind COL 3 25 c9fx figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολημψία 1 there is no favoritism The abstract noun **favoritism** can be expressed with the verb “favor.” To favor some people is to judge them by different standards so the result is better for them than for others who do the same actions. Alternate translation: “God does not favor anyone” or “God judges everyone by the same standard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -COL 4 intro nm3y 0 # Colossians 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[Colossians 4:1](../../col/04/01.md) appears to belong with the topics of Chapter 3 instead of Chapter 4.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “In my own hand”

It was common in the ancient Near East for the author to speak and someone else to write down the words. Many of the New Testament letters were written this way. Paul wrote the final greeting himself.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]]) +COL 4 intro nm3y 0 # Colossians 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[Colossians 4:1](../../col/04/01.md) appears to belong with the topics of Chapter 3 instead of Chapter 4.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “In my own hand”

It was common in the ancient Near East for the author to speak and someone else to write down the words. Many of the New Testament letters were written this way. Paul wrote the final greeting himself.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Secret truth

Paul refers to a “secret truth” in this chapter. The role of the church in the plans of God was once unknown. But God has now revealed it. Part of this involves the Gentiles having equal standing with the Jews in the plans of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]]) COL 4 1 qhd2 0 Connecting Statement: After speaking to masters, Paul ends his special instructions to the different kinds of believers in the church at Colossae. COL 4 1 ae3y figs-doublet τὸ δίκαιον καὶ τὴν ἰσότητα 1 what is right and fair These words mean almost the same thing and are used to emphasize the things that are morally correct. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) COL 4 1 t9wy καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔχετε Κύριον ἐν οὐρανῷ 1 you also have a master in heaven God wants the relationship between an earthly master and his slave to be loving the way God, the heavenly **master**, loves his earthly servants, including the earthly slaves’ masters. diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index b6fa358580..6c2317a1e2 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1TH front intro jp2y 0 # Introduction to 1 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Thessalonians

1. Greeting (1:1)
1. Prayer of thanksgiving for the Thessalonian Christians (1:2-10)
1. Paul’s ministry in Thessalonica (2:1-16)
1. Paul’s concerns for their spiritual growth
- Like a mother (2:7)
- Like a father (2:11)
1. Paul sends Timothy to the Thessalonians and Timothy reports back to Paul (3:1-13)
1. Practical instructions
- Live to please God (4:1-12)
- Comfort regarding those who have died (4:12-18)
- Christ’s return is a motive for godly living (5:1-11)
1. Closing blessings, thanks, and prayers (5:12-28)

### Who wrote 1 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 1 Thessalonians. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth. Of all Paul’s letters that are in the Bible, many scholars think 1 Thessalonians was the first letter Paul wrote.

### What is the Book of 1 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He wrote it after the Jews in the city forced him to leave. In this letter he said he considered his visit to them a success, even though he was forced to leave.

Paul responded to the news from Timothy about the Thessalonian believers. The believers there were being persecuted. He encouraged them to continue living in a way that pleased God. He also comforted them by explaining what happens to those who die before Christ returns.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 Thessalonians” or “First Thessalonians.” They may instead prefer to choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The First Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation, and there will be peace everywhere.

### What happens to those who die before the return of Christ?

Paul made clear that those who die before Christ’s return will come back to life and be with Jesus. They will not remain dead forever. Paul wrote this to encourage the Thessalonians. For some of them worried that those who died would miss the great day when Jesus returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord.”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very a close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “May grace and peace be to you” (1:1). Some older versions read: “Grace and peace to you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.”
* “Instead, we were as gentle among you as a mother comforting her own children.” (2:7) Other modern versions and older versions read, “Instead, we were like babies among you, as when a mother comforts her own children.”
* “Timothy, our brother and fellow worker for God” (3:2). Some other versions read: “Timothy, our brother and servant of God.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hardship

Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 1 intro y8c5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verse 1 formally introduces this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hardship

Other people persecuted the Christians in Thessalonica. But the Christians there handled it well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 1 1 dp37 0 General Information: Paul identifies himself as the writer of the letter and greets the church at Thessalonica. 1TH 1 1 ms5e figs-explicit Παῦλος, καὶ Σιλουανὸς, καὶ Τιμόθεος; τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 Paul and Silvanus and Timothy to the church The UST makes clear that it was Paul who wrote this letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 1 1 luw5 figs-metonymy χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη 1 Grace and peace to you The terms **Grace** and **peace** are metonyms for the person who acts toward people in a kindly and peaceful manner. Alternate translation: “May God be kind to you and give you peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 10 pmi8 ὃν ἤγειρεν 1 whom he raised “whom God caused to live again” 1TH 1 10 wba8 ἐκ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 from the dead “so that he was no longer dead.” This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. 1TH 1 10 pt1s figs-exclusive τὸν ῥυόμενον ἡμᾶς 1 the one rescuing us Here, **us** includes Paul and the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian witness

Paul values his “Christian witness” as evidence that the gospel is true. Paul says that being godly or holy bears witness to the non-Christian. Paul defends his character, so that his witness is not affected. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) +1TH 2 intro kt5l 0 # 1 Thessalonians 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian witness

Paul values his “Christian witness” as evidence that the gospel is true. Paul says that being godly or holy bears witness to the non-Christian. Paul defends his character, so that his witness is not affected. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/testimony]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) 1TH 2 1 pt75 0 Connecting Statement: Paul defines the believers’ service and reward. 1TH 2 1 gpr4 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ…οἴδατε 1 you yourselves know The words **you** and **yourselves** refer to the Thessalonian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 2 1 tdl3 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means fellow Christians, including both men and women. @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 19 mj9n figs-metonymy ἡμῶν ἐλπὶς…ἢ οὐχὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς 1 our hope … Is it not even you By **hope** Paul means the assurance he has that God will reward him for his work. The Thessalonian Christians are the reason for his hope. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 ty78 figs-metonymy ἢ χαρὰ 1 or joy The Thessalonians are the reason for his joy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 e7tl figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Here, **crown** refers to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression **crown of boasting** means a reward for victory, or having done well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Standing

In this chapter, Paul uses “stand firm” to illustrate being steadfast. This is a common way to describe being steadfast or faithful. Paul uses “be shaken” as the opposite of being steadfast. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]]) +1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Standing

In this chapter, Paul uses “stand firm” to illustrate being steadfast. This is a common way to describe being steadfast or faithful. Paul uses “be shaken” as the opposite of being steadfast. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]]) 1TH 3 1 nal1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul tells the believers he has sent Timothy to strengthen their faith. 1TH 3 1 fqe3 μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 enduring it no longer “when we could no longer endure worrying about you” 1TH 3 1 t3vt ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι 1 we thought it good to be left behind at Athens alone “we thought only Silvanus and me should stay behind in Athens” @@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 13 ly21 figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους 1 to strengthen your hearts, blameless Here, **heart** is a metonym for one’s beliefs and convictions. Alternate translation: “to strengthen you, so that you will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 3 13 xsd3 ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus “when Jesus comes back to earth” 1TH 3 13 jlc5 μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ 1 with all his saints “with all those who belong to him” -1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 04 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sexual immorality

Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators must also be aware of cultural taboos. These are topics considered improper to discuss.

### Dying before the return of Christ

In the early church, people apparently wondered what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They may have worried whether those dying before Christ returned would be part of the kingdom of God. Paul answers that concern.

### “Caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air”

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) +1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sexual immorality

Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators must also be aware of cultural taboos. These are topics considered improper to discuss.

### Dying before the return of Christ

In the early church, people apparently wondered what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They may have worried whether those dying before Christ returned would be part of the kingdom of God. Paul answers that concern.

### “Caught up in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air”

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]]) 1TH 4 1 wk39 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians. 1TH 4 1 u2lw figs-doublet ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν 1 we beg and exhort you Paul uses **beg** and **exhort** to emphasize how strongly they encourage the believers. Alternate translation: “we strongly encourage you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 4 1 iij6 figs-activepassive παρελάβετε παρ’ ἡμῶν 1 you received from us You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 4 17 l5l1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 we who are alive Here, **we** refers to all believers who have not died. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 4 17 wvi8 σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 with them The word **them** refers to the dead believers who were made alive again. 1TH 4 17 se1y ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air “will be pulled up … to meet the Lord Jesus in the sky” -1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Day of the Lord

The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Quench the Spirit

This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit’s guidance and work. +1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Day of the Lord

The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will be a surprise to the world. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to live prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Quench the Spirit

This means to ignore or work against the Holy Spirit’s guidance and work. 1TH 5 1 i2vm figs-exclusive 0 General Information: In this chapter the words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 5 1 caue figs-you 0 General Information: The word **you** is plural and refers to the believers at the church of Thessalonica. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1TH 5 1 z1s6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues talking about the day Jesus will come back. diff --git a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv index a283269129..ef4ccbfbbc 100644 --- a/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_54-2TH.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 2TH front intro krd6 0 # Introduction to 2 Thessalonians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Thessalonians

1. Greetings and thanksgiving (1:1-3)
1. Christians suffering from persecution
- They are worthy of the kingdom of God and of his promise of relief from trials (1:4-7)
- God will judge those who persecute Christians (1:8-12)
1. Some believers’ misunderstanding about the second coming of Christ
- Christ’s return has not yet happened (2:1-2)
- Instruction about the events that will precede the return of Christ (2:3-12)
1. Paul’s confidence that God will save the Thessalonian Christians
- His call to “stand firm” (2:13-15)
- His prayer that God will comfort them (2:16-17)
1. Paul requests that the Thessalonian believers pray for him (3:1-5)
1. Paul give commands about idle believers (3:6-15)
1. Closing (3:16-17)

### Who wrote 2 Thessalonians?

Paul wrote 2 Thessalonians. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul wrote this letter while staying in the city of Corinth.

### What is the Book of 2 Thessalonians about?

Paul wrote this letter to the believers in the city of Thessalonica. He encouraged the believers because they were being persecuted. He told them to continue living in a way that pleased God. And he wanted to teach them again about Christ’s return.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Thessalonians” or “Second Thessalonians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Thessalonica,” or “The Second Letter to the Christians in Thessalonica.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the “second coming” of Jesus?

Paul wrote much in this letter about Jesus’ eventual return to Earth. When Jesus returns, he will judge all mankind. He will also rule over creation. And he will cause there to be peace everywhere. Paul also explained that a “man of lawlessness” will come before Christ’s return. This person will obey Satan and cause many people to oppose God. But Jesus will destroy this person when he returns.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Thessalonians?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “and the man of lawlessness is revealed” (2:3). The ULT, UST, and most modern versions read this way. Older versions have, “and the man of sin is revealed.”
* “For God chose you as the firstfruits for salvation” (2:13) The ULT, UST, and some other versions read this way. Other versions have, “For God chose you from the first for salvation.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: “We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God’s righteous judgment.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md)) +2TH 1 intro m987 0 # 2 Thessalonians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1-2 formally introduce this letter. Letters in the ancient Near East commonly had introductions of this type.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. A paradox occurs in verses 4-5: “We talk about your patience and faith in all your persecutions. We talk about the afflictions that you endure. This is a sign of God’s righteous judgment.” People would not normally think that believing in God while being persecuted is a sign of God’s righteous judgment. But in verses 5-10, Paul explains how God will reward those who believe in him and how he will judge those who afflict them. ([2 Thessalonians 1:4-5](./04.md)) 2TH 1 1 b6vf 0 General Information: Paul is the author of this letter, but he includes Silvanus and Timothy as senders of the letter. He begins by greeting the church at Thessalonica. 2TH 1 1 nrxt figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The words “we” and “us” refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 2TH 1 1 x4lj figs-you 0 General Information: The word “you” is plural and refers to the believers at the church of Thessalonica. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 1 12 q994 figs-activepassive ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, ἐν ὑμῖν 1 so that the name of our Lord Jesus may be glorified in you You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “so that you may glorify the name of our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 12 pg2i figs-activepassive καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and you in him You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and Jesus will glorify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TH 1 12 z8k9 κατὰ τὴν χάριν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 according to the grace of our God “because of God’s grace” -2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Being gathered together to be with him”

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Man of lawlessness

This is the same as “son of destruction” and “lawless one” in this chapter. Paul associates him with Satan actively working in the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

### Sits in the temple of God

Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2TH 2 intro jq9r 0 # 2 Thessalonians 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Being gathered together to be with him”

This passage refers to a time when Jesus calls to himself those who have believed in him. Scholars differ on whether or not this refers to Christ’s final glorious return. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Man of lawlessness

This is the same as “son of destruction” and “lawless one” in this chapter. Paul associates him with Satan actively working in the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]])

### Sits in the temple of God

Paul could be referring to the Jerusalem temple that the Romans destroyed several years after he wrote this letter. Or he could be referring to a future physical temple, or to the church as the spiritual temple of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TH 2 1 r36t 0 General Information: Paul exhorts believers not to be deceived about the day Jesus will come back. 2TH 2 1 q1uq δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** marks a change of topic in Paul’s instructions. 2TH 2 1 cvg5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TH 2 16 cm54 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς…Κύριος ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦς Χριστὸς 1 our Lord Jesus Christ himself Here, **himself** gives additional emphasis to the phrase **Lord Jesus Christ.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 2TH 2 17 x3rr figs-metonymy παρακαλέσαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, καὶ στηρίξαι 1 may he comfort and strengthen your hearts Here, **hearts** represents the seat of emotions. Alternate translation: “may he comfort you and strengthen you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 2TH 2 17 yw5f παντὶ ἔργῳ καὶ λόγῳ ἀγαθῷ 1 every good work and word “every good thing you do and say” -2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Idle and lazy persons

In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### What should you do if your brother sins?

In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +2TH 3 intro b8hk 0 # 2 Thessalonians 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Idle and lazy persons

In Thessalonica, there apparently was a problem with people in the church who were able to work but refused to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### What should you do if your brother sins?

In this chapter, Paul teaches that Christians need to live in a way that honors God. Christians should also encourage one another and hold each other accountable for what they do. The church is also responsible for encouraging believers to repent if they sin. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) 2TH 3 1 k33i 0 General Information: Paul asks the believers to pray for him and his companions. 2TH 3 1 jy75 τὸ λοιπὸν 1 Finally Paul uses the word **Finally** to mark a change in topic. 2TH 3 1 m1s5 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) diff --git a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv index 0c02a8a05d..a327c20064 100644 --- a/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_55-1TI.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1TI front intro wy83 0 # Introduction to 1 Timothy


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 1 Timothy

In this letter, Paul alternates between personal commands to Timothy that empower him to act as his representative and with his authority, and instructions for how followers of Jesus should live in community.

1. Greetings (1:1-2)
2. Paul commands Timothy to tell people not to teach false doctrines (1:3-20)
3. Paul gives instructions about how to re-establish order and decency in the church (2:1-15)
4. Paul gives instructions about how to ensure that elders and deacons are properly qualified (3:1-13)
5. Paul commands Timothy regarding his own personal conduct (3:14-5:2)
6. Paul gives instructions to ensure church support for worthy widows (5:3-16) and elders (5:17-20)
7. Paul commands Timothy that he must be impartial (5:21-25)
8. Paul gives instructions to ensure order in master-servant relationships (6:1-2a)
9. Paul commands Timothy regarding how he should teach and conduct himself (6:2b-16)
10. Paul gives instructions for how people who are rich should live (6:17-19)
11. Paul commands Timothy to guard what has been entrusted to his care (6:20-21a)
12. Closing blessing to the whole church (6:21b)

### Who wrote the Book of 1 Timothy?

A man named Paul wrote 1 Timothy. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul may have written other letters to Timothy, but this is the earliest one that we still have. That is why it is known as 1 Timothy or First Timothy. Timothy was Paul’s disciple and close friend. Paul probably wrote this letter near the end of his life.

### What is the Book of 1 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed included church worship, qualifications for church leaders, and warnings against false teachers. This letter shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches while Timothy himself trained other leaders.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its customary title, “1 Timothy” or “First Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is discipleship?

Discipleship is the process of making people to be disciples of Christ. The goal of discipleship is to encourage other Christians to be more like Christ. This letter gives many instructions about how a leader should train a less mature Christian. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by the expression “in Christ”?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 Timothy?

In [6:5](../06/05.md), the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” +1TI 1 intro a4v2 0 # 1 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

In this chapter, Paul calls Timothy a “son” and his “child.” Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul called Timothy his “son in the faith.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/disciple]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Metaphor

In this chapter Paul speaks figuratively of people who are not fulfilling the purpose of their faith as if they had “missed the mark” that they were aiming at, as if they had “turned away” down a wrong path, and as if they had been “shipwrecked.” He speaks figuratively of following Jesus faithfully as “fighting the good fight.” 1TI 1 1 i3zz Παῦλος 1 Paul In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you, Timothy” 1TI 1 1 xl6d κατ’ ἐπιταγὴν Θεοῦ 1 by the command of God Alternate translation: “by the authority of God” 1TI 1 1 wb8j Θεοῦ Σωτῆρος ἡμῶν 1 God our Savior Alternate translation: “God, who saves us” @@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 1 20 ty7n figs-metaphor οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 whom I have given over to Satan Paul speaks figuratively as if he physically took hold of these men and handed them to Satan. If this does not make sense in your language, you can state it plainly. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to command them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 1 20 az10 figs-explicit οὓς παρέδωκα τῷ Σατανᾷ 1 This probably means that Paul expelled them from the community of believers. Since they are no longer a part of the community, Satan has access to them and can harm them. If it would be helpful to your readers, you may want to include this information in a footnote. Alternate translation: “I have allowed Satan to make them suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 1 20 s76c figs-activepassive ἵνα παιδευθῶσι 1 so that they may be taught If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God may teach them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1TI 2 intro c6rf 0 # 1 Timothy 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Peace

Paul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.

### Women in the church

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Other scholars believe that God wants women to use the gifts He gives them on an equal basis with men. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage. +1TI 2 intro c6rf 0 # 1 Timothy 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Peace

Paul encourages Christians to pray for everyone. They should pray for rulers so that Christians can live peacefully, in a godly and dignified way.

### Women in the church

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe that God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Other scholars believe that God wants women to use the gifts He gives them on an equal basis with men. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage. 1TI 2 1 yk2z figs-idiom πρῶτον πάντων 1 first of all As in [1:15](../01/15.md), the term **first** figuratively means the superlative example of a class. Alternate translation: “most importantly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 2 1 iag7 παρακαλῶ 1 I urge Alternate translation: “I encourage” or “I exhort” 1TI 2 1 ql7a figs-activepassive ποιεῖσθαι δεήσεις, προσευχάς, ἐντεύξεις, εὐχαριστίας 1 for requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings to be made If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action and who would receive the action. Alternate translation: “I urge all believers to make requests, prayers, intercessions, and thanksgivings to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 2 15 gh3c ἐὰν μείνωσιν 1 if they remain Here, **they** refers to women. Paul switches from the singular to the plural as he switches from talking about Eve as the representative of women to women in general. Alternate translation: “if women continue living” 1TI 2 15 sl57 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πίστει, καὶ ἀγάπῃ, καὶ ἁγιασμῷ 1 in faith and love and holiness If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **faith**, **love**, and **holiness** with verbs. Alternate translation: “trusting Jesus, loving others, and living in a holy way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 2 15 dcf3 figs-idiom μετὰ σωφροσύνης 1 with self-control Possible meanings of this expression here are: (1) “with good judgment,” (2) “with modesty,” or (3) “with clear thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TI 3 intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.

### Overseers and deacons

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.

### Character qualities

This chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TI 3 intro d9db 0 # 1 Timothy 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

[3:16](../03/16.md) was probably a song, poem, or creed the early church used to express what it understood to be the meaning of who Jesus was and what he did.

### Overseers and deacons

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include elder, pastor, and bishop. The word “overseer” reflects the Greek term in verses 1-2, which means literally an “over-seer.” The word “bishop” is derived directly from the letters of this Greek term. Paul writes about another kind of church leader, a “deacon,” in verses 8 and 12.

### Character qualities

This chapter lists several qualities that an overseer or deacon in the church must have. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TI 3 1 t227 πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy As in [1:15](../01/15.md), in this context the term **word** has a meaning more like “statement” or “message.” Alternate translation: “this statement is dependable” 1TI 3 1 t228 figs-quotemarks πιστὸς ὁ λόγος 1 This word is trustworthy Paul uses this phrase to introduce a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers if you indicate this by setting off the words that follow in the rest of the verse with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language may use to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) 1TI 3 1 t229 translate-unknown ἐπισκοπῆς 1 overseer This term describes a leader of the early Christian church whose work was to take care of the spiritual needs of believers and make sure that they received accurate biblical teaching. Alternate translation: “spiritual leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 3 16 h9mb figs-activepassive ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ 1 was believed in the world If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “people throughout the world believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 3 16 jz11 figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ 1 was taken up in glory If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God the Father took him up to heaven in glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 3 16 mr3a figs-abstractnouns ἀνελήμφθη ἐν δόξῃ 1 was taken up in glory The abstract noun **glory** refers to the way Jesus received power from God the Father and is worthy of honor. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind this term with an adjective such as “powerful” and a verb such as “admire.” Alternate translation: “God the Father took him up to heaven, making him powerful and making everyone admire him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TI 4 intro b39h 0 # 1 Timothy 04 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

Paul speaks in [4:14](../04/14.md) of prophecy. A “prophecy” is a message that God communicates to people through someone to whom He has given a special gift of hearing and conveying these messages. The specific prophecy that Paul describes revealed how Timothy would become a gifted leader of the church. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Cultural practices

In verse 14 Paul speaks of church leaders placing their hands on Timothy. That was one way of indicating publicly that a person was being placed in a leadership position in the church.

### Variation in names

In this chapter Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” They seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3. +1TI 4 intro b39h 0 # 1 Timothy 4 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

Paul speaks in [4:14](../04/14.md) of prophecy. A “prophecy” is a message that God communicates to people through someone to whom He has given a special gift of hearing and conveying these messages. The specific prophecy that Paul describes revealed how Timothy would become a gifted leader of the church. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Cultural practices

In verse 14 Paul speaks of church leaders placing their hands on Timothy. That was one way of indicating publicly that a person was being placed in a leadership position in the church.

### Variation in names

In this chapter Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” They seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3. 1TI 4 1 jzr9 δὲ 1 Now Paul uses this word to introduce background information that will help Timothy and the believers in Ephesus understand the next part of his letter. The false teachings that Timothy must oppose are something that the Spirit has already predicted. You can translate the term with the word or phrase in your language that is most similar in meaning and significance. 1TI 4 1 b739 figs-idiom ἐν ὑστέροις καιροῖς 1 in later times This expression refers to the time period when God’s purposes in history are approaching their culmination and so the evil opposition to them increases. Paul is probably referring to the time period between Jesus’ resurrection and his second coming. Alternate translation: “in these days as God’s purposes advance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TI 4 1 b931 figs-metaphor ἀποστήσονταί τινες τῆς πίστεως 1 some will leave the faith Paul speaks of people ceasing to trust in Christ as if they were physically leaving a place. Alternate translation: “some people will stop trusting in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -252,7 +252,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 4 16 uq6c ἔπεχε σεαυτῷ καὶ τῇ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 Pay attention to yourself and to the teaching Alternate translation: “Pay attention to how you live and to what you teach” 1TI 4 16 zxe7 ἐπίμενε αὐτοῖς 1 Continue in these things Alternate translation: “continue to do these things” 1TI 4 16 u7ez καὶ σεαυτὸν σώσεις καὶ τοὺς ἀκούοντάς σου 1 you will save both yourself and your listeners Possible meanings are: (1) Timothy will save himself and those who hear him from God’s judgment (2) Timothy will protect himself and those who hear him from the influence of false teachers. Perhaps Paul means both things since, if Timothy can persuade the people of the church in Ephesus not to listen to the false teachers, then he will also spare them from God’s judgment for the wrong things they would have done if they had listened to those teachers. Alternate translation: “you will keep both yourself and your listeners from believing and doing the wrong things” -1TI 5 intro jx4e 0 # 1 Timothy 05 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Honor and respect

Paul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.

### Widows

In the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows because they could not provide for themselves.

### Variation in names

In this chapter, as in chapter 4, Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” Here, as well, they seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3. +1TI 5 intro jx4e 0 # 1 Timothy 5 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Honor and respect

Paul encourages younger Christians to honor and respect older Christians. Cultures honor and respect older people in different ways.

### Widows

In the ancient Near East, it was important to care for widows because they could not provide for themselves.

### Variation in names

In this chapter, as in chapter 4, Paul speaks of church leaders called “elders.” Here, as well, they seem to be the same kind of leaders that he calls “overseers” in chapter 3. 1TI 5 1 wt5y figs-you 0 General Information: Paul was giving these commands to one person, Timothy. Languages that have different forms of “you” or different forms for commands would use the singular form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) 1TI 5 1 l4w5 πρεσβυτέρῳ μὴ ἐπιπλήξῃς 1 Do not rebuke an older man Alternate translation: “do not reprimand an older man” 1TI 5 1 dnf2 ἀλλὰ παρακάλει 1 but exhort him Alternate translation: “instead, encourage him” @@ -343,7 +343,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TI 5 25 bl51 figs-metaphor καὶ τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 1 and the ones having otherwise are not able to be hidden Paul speaks of good works as if they were objects that someone could hide. Alternate translation: “and people will find out later about even those good deeds that are not obvious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 5 25 t420 figs-activepassive καὶ τὰ ἄλλως ἔχοντα, κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 1 and the ones having otherwise are not able to be hidden If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “and people who secretly do good works will not be able to hide them forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TI 5 25 bb2t figs-doublenegatives κρυβῆναι οὐ δύναταί 1 If it is clearer in your language, you can say this in a positive way. Alternate translation: “people will learn about later” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1TI 6 intro rks4 0 # 1 Timothy 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Slavery

In this chapter Paul teaches slaves about honoring, respecting, and diligently serving their masters. This does not mean that he is endorsing slavery as a good thing or as something that God approves of. Instead, Paul is encouraging believers to be godly and content in every situation that they are in. This does not mean that they cannot also work to change those situations. +1TI 6 intro rks4 0 # 1 Timothy 6 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Slavery

In this chapter Paul teaches slaves about honoring, respecting, and diligently serving their masters. This does not mean that he is endorsing slavery as a good thing or as something that God approves of. Instead, Paul is encouraging believers to be godly and content in every situation that they are in. This does not mean that they cannot also work to change those situations. 1TI 6 1 nm4n figs-metaphor ὅσοι εἰσὶν ὑπὸ ζυγὸν δοῦλοι 1 As many slaves as are under the yoke Paul speaks of people who work as slaves as though they were oxen plowing or pulling with a yoke around their necks. Alternate translation: “concerning people who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TI 6 1 ep1l figs-explicit ὅσοι εἰσὶν 1 as many … as are The implication in context is that Paul is speaking about believers who are slaves. Alternate translation: “believers who are working as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TI 6 1 he2n figs-activepassive ἵνα μὴ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ ἡ διδασκαλία βλασφημῆται 1 so that the name of God and the teaching may not be blasphemed If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “so that unbelievers will not insult God’s character or what we believe and teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv index de27f48819..3da22d9a33 100644 --- a/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv +++ b/en_tn_56-2TI.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 2TI front intro s7fk 0 # Introduction to 2 Timothy


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 2 Timothy

1. Paul greets Timothy and encourages him to endure hardship as he serves God (1:1-2:13).
2. Paul gives general instructions to Timothy (2:14-26).
3. Paul warns Timothy about future events and instructs him about how to carry out his service to God (3:1-4:8).
4. Paul makes personal remarks (4:9-22).

### Who wrote the book of 2 Timothy?

Paul wrote 2 Timothy. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

This book is the second letter Paul wrote to Timothy. Timothy was his disciple and close friend. Paul wrote this letter while in prison in Rome. Paul would die soon after writing this letter.

### What is the book of 2 Timothy about?

Paul had left Timothy in the city of Ephesus to help the believers there. Paul wrote this letter to instruct Timothy about various matters. The topics he addressed include warnings about false teachers and advice about enduring difficult situations. This letter also shows how Paul was training Timothy to be a leader among the churches.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Timothy” or “Second Timothy.” Or they may choose a different title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to Timothy” or “The Second Letter to Timothy.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the soldier imagery in 2 Timothy?

As Paul waited in prison, knowing he would die soon, he spoke of being a soldier of Jesus Christ. Soldiers have to obey to their leaders. In the same way, Christians have to obey Jesus. As “soldiers” of Christ, believers are to obey his commands, even if they die as a result.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

God is the true author of Scripture. He inspired the human authors who wrote the books. That means God in some way caused the people to write what they wrote. This is why the Bible is also referred to as God’s word. This implies several things about it. First, everything that the Bible teaches is free from error and can be trusted. Second, God will always preserve his Scripture for every generation of people. Third, God’s word should be translated into all the world’s languages.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Here the word “you” is almost always singular and refers to Timothy. The exception to this is 4:22. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### Inclusive and exclusive “we” and “us”

In this book, “we” and “us” include the writer, Paul, the recipient, Timothy, and all believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])

### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?

Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union between Christ and the believers. Please see the introduction to the book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What are the major textual issues in the text of the book of 2 Timothy?

For the following verses, the oldest Greek manuscripts differ from later Greek manuscripts. Modern translations may also differ depending on the Greek manuscript that they translate from. The ULT text translates the Greek from the oldest manuscripts, and puts the differences from later manuscripts in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible already exists in the general region, translators should consider following the decision in that translation. If not, translators are advised to follow the oldest Greek manuscripts as reflected in the ULT text.
* “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher” (1:11). Some later manuscripts read, “Because of this, I was appointed a preacher, an apostle, and a teacher to the Gentiles.”
* “Warn them before God” (2:14). Some later manuscripts read, “Warn them before the Lord.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Persecution

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel. +2TI 1 intro p5lf 0 # 2 Timothy 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Spiritual children

Paul discipled Timothy as a Christian and a church leader. Paul may also have led him to believe in Christ. Therefore, Paul calls Timothy “beloved child.” So even though Paul was not Timothy’s father, Paul speaks of his relationship with Timothy as that of a father and son in a spiritual sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Persecution

Paul was in prison when he wrote this letter. Paul encourages Timothy to be willing to suffer for the gospel. 2TI 1 1 p001 translate-names Παῦλος 1 Paul This is the name of a man, the author of the letter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 1 ha4l Παῦλος 1 Paul This letter follows the normal custom of the time by beginning with the name and identity of the author, then mentioning the recipient (in verse 2). Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. If so, you can use it in your translation. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am writing this letter” 2TI 1 1 vl2g διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ 1 through the will of God Paul became an apostle because God wanted him to be an apostle. Alternate translation: “because of God’s will” or “because God wanted it to be so” @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 1 18 f3ep figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 in that day The expression **that day** refers to the day when God will judge all people; at that time they will receive mercy from the Lord, as Paul mentions, or wrath. Alternate translation: “on the day of judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 1 18 p024 translate-names Ἐφέσῳ 1 Ephesus This is the name of a city, the place where Timothy, the recipient of the letter, is located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) 2TI 1 18 p025 figs-explicit ὅσα ἐν Ἐφέσῳ διηκόνησεν, βέλτιον σὺ γινώσκεις 1 how much he served in Ephesus, you know very well Paul is reminding Timothy that Onesiphorus helped him earlier, in Ephesus. So, Paul is asking the Lord to bless Onesiphorus because he helped Paul several times. Alternate translation: “you know well how much he also helped me earlier when I was in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 11b-13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### We will reign with him

Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Analogies

In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house. +2TI 2 intro k3zn 0 # 2 Timothy 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In verses 11b-13, Paul may be quoting a poem or hymn. To show the reader that this may be a quotation, in your translation you may choose to set these verses farther to the right than the other verses in the chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### We will reign with him

Faithful Christians will reign with Christ in the future. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Analogies

In this chapter, Paul makes several analogies to teach about living as a Christian. He uses analogies of soldiers, athletes, and farmers. Later in the chapter, he uses the analogy of different kinds of containers in a house. 2TI 2 1 bll5 figs-metaphor τέκνον μου 1 my child Here, **child** is a term of great love and approval. Timothy is not Paul’s biological child. It is also likely that Paul introduced Timothy to Christ, and so this is why Paul considered him like his own child. Alternate translation: “who are like my child” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 1 p026 figs-activepassive ἐνδυναμοῦ 1 be strengthened You could say this with an active form, and you could say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “let God make you strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 1 e6ex figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ χάριτι τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 in the grace that is in Christ Jesus Paul wants Timothy to experience the strength that God provides through his **grace** or kindness. Believers experience God’s grace through knowing Jesus Christ. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an adjective. Alternate translation: “as you allow Christ Jesus to kindly empower you through your relationship to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 2 26 mql8 figs-metaphor ἐκ τῆς τοῦ διαβόλου παγίδος 1 from the trap of the devil Paul refers to the deception of the devil as a physical trap that sinners are captured in. Alternate translation: “and escape from the devil’s deception” or “and reject the devil’s deception” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2TI 2 26 p074 figs-activepassive ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “after the devil has captured them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2TI 2 26 dj4j figs-metaphor ἐζωγρημένοι ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ ἐκείνου θέλημα 1 having been captured by him for his will Paul speaks of the devil’s deception as if the devil had physically captured them and made them do what he wanted. Alternate translation: “after the devil has deceived them and made them do what he wanted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1-9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) +2TI 3 intro k2cr 0 # 2 Timothy 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

Many scholars understand the **last days** to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return, which includes Paul’s time. If so, then what Paul teaches in this chapter about being persecuted applies to all believers. But some scholars understand the **last days** to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. If that is the meaning, then Paul is prophesying in verses 1-9 and 13 about those days. If possible, translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]]) 2TI 3 1 g65r figs-idiom ἐν ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις 1 in the last days Paul is using the term **days** figuratively to refer to a particular time. Alternate translation: “during the period of time before the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 2TI 3 1 n7gs figs-explicit ἐνστήσονται καιροὶ χαλεποί 1 there will be difficult times The implication from what Paul goes on to say about people becoming ungodly and violent is that it will be difficult for believers in this time period. Alternate translation: “believers will face difficult situations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 3 2 p075 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἄνθρωποι 1 men Here Paul is using the term **men** in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2TI 3 17 nb12 figs-gendernotations ὁ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωπος 1 the man of God Paul is using the word **man** here in a generic sense that includes all believers in God, whether male or female. Of course, Paul also intends for Timothy to apply this to himself. Alternate translation: “the person who serves God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) 2TI 3 17 uu7i ἄρτιος 1 proficient Alternative translation: “fully capable” 2TI 3 17 p099 figs-activepassive ἐξηρτισμένος 1 equipped If your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form to express this same idea. Alternate translation: “and have everything he needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -2TI 4 intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1-8)
2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9-18)
3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19-22)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “I adjure you”

With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.

### Crown

Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth. +2TI 4 intro k2xa 0 # 2 Timothy 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Paul gives a solemn charge to Timothy (4:1-8)
2. Paul tells Timothy how he is doing (4:9-18)
3. Paul sends personal greetings (4:19-22)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “I adjure you”

With these words Paul challenges Timothy in the most serious way possible to do what he is telling him to do. It is a way of commanding Timothy, not by Paul’s own authority, but by the authority that he then refers to, that of God and Jesus Christ. In other words, Paul is saying that God and Jesus Christ are commanding Timothy through Paul.

### Crown

Scripture uses the image of a crown to represent different things. In this chapter, Paul describes Christ as awarding a crown to believers as a metaphor for the reward that Christ will give them for having lived rightly on this earth. 2TI 4 1 eh3x διαμαρτύρομαι 1 I adjure you The word translated **adjure** is used to place someone under a serious and binding obligation. Think about the words that you use to do this in your language. This could mean: (1) This refers to placing someone under an oath to do something. Alternate translation: “I place you under an oath” or “I hereby obligate you” (2) This refers to solemnly commanding someone with great authority. Alternate translation: “I solemnly urge you” 2TI 4 1 cb15 figs-explicit ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 before God and Christ Jesus Here the word **before** means “in front of,” that is, “in the presence of.” The implication is that God and Christ Jesus will witness and approve this command or oath. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God and Christ Jesus” or “with God and Christ Jesus as the witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2TI 4 1 u32g figs-merism ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς 1 the living and the dead Paul refers to **the living** and **the dead** together to mean all people, whether they are alive at the time of judgment or have died. Alternate translation: “those who are still alive and those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) diff --git a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv index 914f35fd1e..0a9b2848ad 100644 --- a/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_57-TIT.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote TIT front intro m2jl 0 # Introduction to Titus


## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Titus

1. Paul instructs Titus to appoint godly leaders. (1:1-16)
2. Paul instructs Titus to train people to live godly lives. (2:1-3:11)
3. Paul ends by sharing some of his plans and sending greetings to various believers. (3:12-15)

### Who wrote the Book of Titus?

Paul wrote the Book of Titus. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

### What is the Book of Titus about?

Paul wrote this letter to Titus, his fellow worker, who was leading the churches on the island of Crete. Paul instructed him about selecting church leaders. Paul also described how the believers should behave towards each other. He also encouraged them all to live in a way that pleases God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Titus.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to Titus” or “A Letter to Titus”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### In what roles can people serve within the church?

There are some teachings in the Book of Titus about whether a woman or divorced man can serve in positions of leadership within the church. Scholars disagree about the meaning of these teachings. Further study on these issues may be necessary before translating this book.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural **you**

In this book, the word **I** refers to Paul. Also, the word **you** is almost always singular and refers to Titus. The exception to this is 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What is the meaning of **God our Savior**?

This is a common phrase in this letter. Paul meant to make the readers think about how God forgave them in Christ for sinning against him, and by forgiving them he saved them from being punished when he judges all people. A similar phrase in this letter is **our great God and Savior Jesus Christ**. -TIT 1 intro c7me 0 # Titus 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

In verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elders

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Should, may, must

The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way. +TIT 1 intro c7me 0 # Titus 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul formally introduces this letter in verses 1-4. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

In verses 6-9, Paul lists several qualities that a man must have if he is to be an elder in the church. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) Paul gives a similar list in 1 Timothy 3.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Elders

The church has used different titles for church leaders. Some titles include overseer, elder, pastor, and bishop.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Should, may, must

The ULT uses different words that indicate requirements or obligations. These verbs have different levels of force associated with them. The subtle differences may be difficult to translate. The UST translates these verbs in a more general way. TIT 1 1 rtc9 figs-abstractnouns κατὰ πίστιν 1 for the faith **Faith** is an abstract noun. Here it refers to believing or trusting in Jesus. If it is more clear in your language, you can translate it with a verb such as these, as in the UST. Alternate Translation: “to strengthen the faith” or “to help [God’s chosen people] to trust him more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 1 1 xyz8 figs-abstractnouns ἐπίγνωσιν 1 the knowledge Here, **knowledge** is an abstract noun. If it is clearer in your language, you can use a verb such as “to know,” as in the UST. Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) TIT 1 1 abc8 figs-abstractnouns ἀληθείας 1 of the truth Here, **truth** is an abstract noun. If it is clearer in your language, you can use an adjective phrase such as “what is true” or “the true message.” Paul wants people to know the true message about God and Christ so that they can live in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ TIT 1 15 n3wk figs-metaphor τοῖς…μεμιαμμένοις καὶ ἀπί TIT 1 16 abco grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 but The connecting word **but** introduces a contrast between what these corrupt people say (they know God) and what their actions show (they do not know God). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) TIT 1 16 i3l2 τοῖς…ἔργοις ἀρνοῦνται 1 they deny him by their actions “how they live proves that they do not know him” TIT 1 16 ja47 βδελυκτοὶ ὄντες 1 They are detestable “They are disgusting” -TIT 2 intro h3il 0 # Titus 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gender roles

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches slaves to faithfully serve their masters. He teaches all believers to be godly and live rightly in every situation. +TIT 2 intro h3il 0 # Titus 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Gender roles

Scholars are divided over how to understand this passage in its historical and cultural context. Some scholars believe men and women are perfectly equal in all things. Other scholars believe God created men and women to serve in distinctly different roles in marriage and the church. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this passage.

### Slavery

Paul does not write in this chapter about whether slavery is good or bad. Paul teaches slaves to faithfully serve their masters. He teaches all believers to be godly and live rightly in every situation. TIT 2 1 lfu1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues giving Titus reasons to preach God’s word, and explains how the older men, older women, young men, and slaves or servants should live as believers. TIT 2 1 tpi2 figs-explicit σὺ δὲ 1 But you Here, **you** is singular and refers to Titus. If it is helpful, you can include the name “Titus” here as in the UST ([[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) TIT 2 1 ph2j τῇ ὑγιαινούσῃ διδασκαλίᾳ 1 with sound teaching See the note on [Titus 1:9](../01/09/pzi1). Alternate translation: “with sound doctrine” or “with correct teachings” @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ TIT 2 15 b94z figs-explicit ἔλεγχε, μετὰ πάσης ἐπιταγῆ TIT 2 15 h15y μηδείς σου περιφρονείτω 1 Let no one disregard you “Do not allow anyone to ignore you” TIT 2 15 xy22 figs-doublenegatives μηδείς σου περιφρονείτω 1 Let no one disregard you You can state this positively: “Make sure that everyone listens to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) TIT 2 15 jbu1 figs-explicit σου περιφρονείτω 1 Let … disregard you The way that people would disregard Titus can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “Let … refuse to listen to your words” or “Let … refuse to respect you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -TIT 3 intro zh6x 0 # Titus 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul gives Titus personal instructions in this chapter.

Verse 15 formally concludes this letter. This is a common way of ending a letter in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Genealogies

Genealogies (verse 9) are lists that record a person’s ancestors or descendants, and show from what tribe and family a person came. For example, priests came from the tribe of Levi and the family of Aaron. Some of these lists included stories of ancestors and even of spiritual beings. These lists and stories were used to argue about where things came from and about how important various people were. +TIT 3 intro zh6x 0 # Titus 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul gives Titus personal instructions in this chapter.

Verse 15 formally concludes this letter. This is a common way of ending a letter in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Genealogies

Genealogies (verse 9) are lists that record a person’s ancestors or descendants, and show from what tribe and family a person came. For example, priests came from the tribe of Levi and the family of Aaron. Some of these lists included stories of ancestors and even of spiritual beings. These lists and stories were used to argue about where things came from and about how important various people were. TIT 3 1 y9tr 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues giving Titus instructions on how to teach the elders and people under his care in Crete. TIT 3 1 j2sa ὑπομίμνῃσκε αὐτοὺς…ὑποτάσσεσθαι 1 Remind them to submit “Tell our people again what they already know, to submit” or “Keep reminding them to submit” TIT 3 1 w3fy ἀρχαῖς, ἐξουσίαις, ὑποτάσσεσθαι, πειθαρχεῖν 1 to submit to rulers and authorities, to obey them “to do as the political rulers and government authorities say by obeying them” diff --git a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv index 1882f21c42..ae4b93db9e 100644 --- a/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv +++ b/en_tn_59-HEB.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote HEB front intro xy4n 0 # Introduction to Hebrews

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Hebrews

1. Jesus is superior to God’s prophets and angels (1:1-4:13)
1. Jesus is superior to the priests who serve in the temple in Jerusalem (4:14-7:28)
1. Jesus’ ministry is superior to the old covenant that God made with his people (8:1-10:39)
1. What faith is like (11:1-40)
1. Encouragement to be faithful to God (12:1-29)
1. Concluding encouragements and greetings (13:1-25)

### Who wrote the Book of Hebrews?

No one knows who wrote Hebrews. Scholars have suggested several different people who could possibly be the author. Possible authors are Paul, Luke, and Barnabas. The date of writing is also not known. Most scholars think it was written before A.D. 70. Jerusalem was destroyed in A.D. 70, but the writer of this letter spoke about Jerusalem as if it had not yet been destroyed.

### What is the Book of Hebrews about?

In the Book of Hebrews, the author shows that Jesus fulfilled Old Testament prophecies. The author did this in order to encourage the Jewish Christians and to explain that Jesus is better than anything that the old covenant had to offer. Jesus is the perfect High Priest. Jesus was also the perfect sacrifice. Animal sacrifices became useless because Jesus’ sacrifice was once and for all time. Therefore, Jesus is the one and only way for people to be accepted by God.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Hebrews.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Letter to the Hebrews” or “A Letter to the Jewish Christians.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Can readers understand this book without knowing about the sacrifices and the work of the priests required in the Old Testament?

It would be very difficult for readers to understand this book without understanding these matters. Translators might consider explaining some of these Old Testament concepts in notes or in an introduction to this book.

### How is the idea of blood used in the Book of Hebrews?

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:7](../../heb/09/07.md), the idea of blood is often used as metonymy to represent the death of any animal that was sacrificed according to God’s covenant with Israel. The author also used blood to represent the death of Jesus Christ. Jesus became the perfect sacrifice so that God would forgive people for sinning against him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

Beginning in [Hebrews 9:19](../../heb/09/19.md), the author used the idea of sprinkling as a symbolic action. Old Testament priests sprinkled the blood of the animals sacrificed. This was a symbol of the benefits of the animal’s death being applied to the people or to an object. This showed that the people or the object was acceptable to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Hebrews in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God views Christians as sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* Sometimes the meaning indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 6:10; 13:24)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.” (See: 2:11: 9:13; 10:10, 14, 29; 13:12)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Hebrews?

For the following verses, modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “you crowned him with glory and honor” (2:7). Some older versions read, “you crowned him with glory and honor and you have put him over the works of your hands.”
* “those who did not unite in faith with those who obeyed” (4:2). Some older versions read, “those who heard it without joining faith to it.”
* “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that have come” (9:11). Some modern versions and older versions read, “Christ came as a high priest of the good things that are to come.”
* “on those who were prisoners” (10:34). Some older versions read, “of me in my chains.”
* “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were killed with the sword” (11:37). Some older versions read, “They were stoned. They were sawn in two. They were tempted. They were killed with the sword.”
* “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned” (12:20). Some older versions read, “If even an animal touches the mountain, it must be stoned or shot with an arrow.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter describes how Jesus is more important to us than the angels are.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:5, 7-13, which are words from the Old Testament.

### “Our ancestors”

The writer wrote this letter to Christians who had grown up as Jews. This is why the letter is called “Hebrews.”

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of proving Jesus is better than the angels. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that God’s Son is more important than any of the angels.

### Poetry

Jewish teachers, like the Old Testament prophets, would put their most important teachings in the form of poetry so that the hearers would be able to learn and remember them. +HEB 1 intro aaf9 0 # Hebrews 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter describes how Jesus is more important to us than the angels are.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 1:5, 7-13, which are words from the Old Testament.

### “Our ancestors”

The writer wrote this letter to Christians who had grown up as Jews. This is why the letter is called “Hebrews.”

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical questions

The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of proving Jesus is better than the angels. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that God’s Son is more important than any of the angels.

### Poetry

Jewish teachers, like the Old Testament prophets, would put their most important teachings in the form of poetry so that the hearers would be able to learn and remember them. HEB 1 1 c5f3 0 General Information: Although this letter does not mention the recipients to whom it was sent, the author wrote particularly to Hebrews (Jews), who would have understood the many Old Testament references. HEB 1 1 c5f4 0 General Information: This prologue lays the background for the whole book: the unsurpassing greatness of the Son — the Son is greater than all. The book begins with emphasizing that the Son is better than the prophets and the angels. HEB 1 2 scr8 ἐπ’ ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν τούτων 1 in these last days “in these final days.” This phrase refers to the time when Jesus began his ministry, extending until God establishes his complete rule in his creation. @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ HEB 1 13 s6k7 translate-symaction κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Sit at HEB 1 13 ulp5 figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου, ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a stool for your feet Christ’s enemies are spoken of as if they will become an object on which a king rests his feet. This image represents defeat and dishonor for his enemies. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 1 14 fk5v figs-rquestion οὐχὶ πάντες εἰσὶν λειτουργικὰ πνεύματα…κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν? 1 Are not all angels spirits … inherit salvation? The author uses this question to remind the readers that angels are not as powerful as Christ, but they have a different role. Alternate translation: “All angels are spirits who … inherit salvation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) HEB 1 14 v541 figs-metaphor διὰ τοὺς μέλλοντας κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν 1 for those who will inherit salvation Receiving what God has promised believers is spoken of as if it were inheriting property and wealth from a family member. Alternate translation: “for those whom God will save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 2 intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter is about how Jesus is better than Moses, the greatest Israelite.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:6-8, 12-13, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Brothers

The author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews. +HEB 2 intro s2gd 0 # Hebrews 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter is about how Jesus is better than Moses, the greatest Israelite.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:6-8, 12-13, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Brothers

The author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews. HEB 2 1 x7px 0 Connecting Statement: This is the first of five urgent warnings the author gives. HEB 2 1 c72f figs-exclusive δεῖ…ἡμᾶς 1 we must Here, **we** refers to the author and includes his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) HEB 2 1 ayd1 figs-metaphor μήποτε παραρυῶμεν 1 so that we do not drift away from it This could mean: (1) People who stop believing in God’s word are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop believing it” (2) People who stop obeying God’s words are spoken of as if they were drifting away, like a boat drifts from its position in the water. Alternate translation: “so that we do not stop obeying it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ HEB 2 17 v3pw τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ὁμοιωθῆναι 1 like his br HEB 2 17 u6ch εἰς τὸ ἱλάσκεσθαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας τοῦ λαοῦ 1 he would bring about the pardon of the people’s sins Christ’s death on the cross means that God can forgive sins. Alternate translation: “he would make it possible for God to forgive people’s sins” HEB 2 18 xde4 figs-activepassive πειρασθείς 1 was tempted You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Satan tempted him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 2 18 a3a6 figs-activepassive πειραζομένοις 1 who are tempted You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom Satan is tempting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 3 intro mu26 0 # Hebrews 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 3:7-11,15, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Brothers

The author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Harden your hearts

A person who hardens his heart is a person who will not listen to or obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical questions

The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of warning his readers. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that they need to listen to God and obey him. +HEB 3 intro mu26 0 # Hebrews 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 3:7-11,15, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Brothers

The author probably uses the term “brothers” to refer to Christians who grew up as Jews.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Harden your hearts

A person who hardens his heart is a person who will not listen to or obey God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Rhetorical questions

The author uses rhetorical questions as a way of warning his readers. Both he and the readers know the answers to the questions, and the writer knows that as the readers think about the answers to the questions, they will realize that they need to listen to God and obey him. HEB 3 1 m1cv 0 Connecting Statement: This second warning is longer and more detailed and includes chapters 3 and 4. The writer begins by showing that Christ is better than his servant Moses. HEB 3 1 tp7e figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ ἅγιοι 1 holy brothers Here, **brothers** refer to fellow Christians, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “holy brothers and sisters” or “my holy fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) HEB 3 1 af15 figs-metonymy κλήσεως ἐπουρανίου, μέτοχοι 1 you share in a heavenly calling Here, **heavenly** represents God. Alternate translation: “God has called us together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ HEB 3 17 aha2 translate-numbers τεσσεράκοντα ἔτη 1 forty years HEB 3 18 l1gc figs-rquestion τίσιν δὲ ὤμοσεν μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἀπειθήσασιν? 1 To whom did he swear that they would not enter his rest, if it was not to those who disobeyed him? The author uses this question to teach his readers. Alternate translation: “And it was to those who disobeyed that he swore they would not enter his rest.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) HEB 3 18 q16u figs-metaphor μὴ εἰσελεύσεσθαι εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ 1 they would not enter his rest The peace and security provided by God are spoken of as if they were rest that he can give, and as if they were a place to which people could go. Alternate translation: “they would not enter the place of rest” or “they would not experience his blessings of rest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 3 19 x18z figs-abstractnouns δι’ ἀπιστίαν 1 because of unbelief The abstract noun “unbelief” can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because they did not believe him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -HEB 4 intro u72n 0 # Hebrews 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter tells why Jesus is the greatest high priest.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:3-4, 7, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God’s rest

The word **rest** seems to refer to at least two things in this chapter. It refers to a place or time when God will allow his people to rest from their work ([Hebrews 4:3](../../heb/04/03.md)), and it refers to God resting on the seventh day ([Hebrews 4:4](../../heb/04/04.md)). +HEB 4 intro u72n 0 # Hebrews 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter tells why Jesus is the greatest high priest.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 4:3-4, 7, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God’s rest

The word **rest** seems to refer to at least two things in this chapter. It refers to a place or time when God will allow his people to rest from their work ([Hebrews 4:3](../../heb/04/03.md)), and it refers to God resting on the seventh day ([Hebrews 4:4](../../heb/04/04.md)). HEB 4 1 n98m 0 Connecting Statement: Chapter 4 continues the warning to believers starting in [Hebrews 3:7](../03/07.md). God, through the writer, gives believers a rest of which God’s rest in the creation of the world is a picture. HEB 4 1 ay25 οὖν 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true” or “Since God will certainly punish those who do not obey” HEB 4 1 zta2 figs-metaphor μήποτε καταλειπομένης ἐπαγγελίας εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν κατάπαυσιν αὐτοῦ, δοκῇ τις ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑστερηκέναι 1 none of you might seem to have failed to reach the promise left behind for you to enter God’s rest God’s promise is spoken of as if it were a gift that God left behind when he visited the people. Alternate translation: “none of you fail to enter into God’s rest, which he promised to us” or “God will allow you all to enter into his rest as he promised us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -206,7 +206,7 @@ HEB 4 15 d26h figs-activepassive πεπειρασμένον…κατὰ πάντ HEB 4 15 fve3 χωρὶς ἁμαρτίας 1 he is without sin “he did not sin” HEB 4 16 aj1p figs-metonymy τῷ θρόνῳ τῆς χάριτος 1 to the throne of grace “to God’s throne, where there is grace.” Here, **throne** refers to God ruling as king. Alternate translation: “to where our gracious God is sitting on his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 4 16 py6d figs-metaphor λάβωμεν ἔλεος, καὶ χάριν εὕρωμεν, εἰς εὔκαιρον βοήθειαν 1 we may receive mercy and find grace to help in time of need Here, **mercy** and **grace** are spoken of as if they were objects that can be given or can be found. Alternate translation: “God may be merciful and gracious and help us in time of need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the teaching of the previous chapter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 5:5-6.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### High priest

Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Milk and solid food

The writer speaks of Christians who are only able to understand simple things about Jesus as if they were babies, who drink only milk and cannot eat solid food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +HEB 5 intro b67j 0 # Hebrews 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the teaching of the previous chapter.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 5:5-6.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### High priest

Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Milk and solid food

The writer speaks of Christians who are only able to understand simple things about Jesus as if they were babies, who drink only milk and cannot eat solid food. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 5 1 dn18 0 Connecting Statement: The writer describes the sinfulness of the Old Testament priests, then he shows that Christ has a better kind of priesthood, not based on Aaron’s priesthood but on the priesthood of Melchizedek. HEB 5 1 whq1 figs-activepassive ἐξ ἀνθρώπων λαμβανόμενος 1 chosen from among people You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom God chooses from among the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) HEB 5 1 ndz7 figs-activepassive καθίσταται 1 is appointed You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God appoints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ HEB 5 12 yk1q figs-metaphor γάλακτος, οὐ στερεᾶς τροφῆ HEB 5 13 nhx3 figs-metonymy μετέχων γάλακτος 1 takes milk Here, **takes** stands for “drinks.” Alternate translation: “drinks milk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 5 13 vl7k figs-metaphor νήπιος γάρ ἐστιν 1 because he is still a little child Spiritual maturity is compared with the kind of food that a growing child eats. Solid food is not for a tiny baby, and that is a figure describing a young Christian who only learns simple truths; but later, more solid food is given to the little child, just as when a person matures he can learn about matters that are more difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 5 14 e3yh figs-metonymy τῶν διὰ τὴν ἕξιν τὰ αἰσθητήρια γεγυμνασμένα, ἐχόντων πρὸς διάκρισιν, καλοῦ τε καὶ κακοῦ 1 who because of their maturity have their understanding trained for distinguishing good from evil People trained to understand something are spoken of as if their ability to understand had been trained. Alternate translation: “who are mature and can distinguish between good and evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Abrahamic Covenant

In the covenant that God made with Abraham, God promised to make Abraham’s descendants into a great nation. He also promised to protect Abraham’s descendants and to give them land of their own. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) +HEB 6 intro nz5i 0 # Hebrews 6 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Abrahamic Covenant

In the covenant that God made with Abraham, God promised to make Abraham’s descendants into a great nation. He also promised to protect Abraham’s descendants and to give them land of their own. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) HEB 6 1 f1nk 0 Connecting Statement: The writer continues with what immature Hebrew believers need to do to become mature Christians. He reminds them of the foundational teachings. HEB 6 1 i4xr figs-metaphor ἀφέντες τὸν τῆς ἀρχῆς τοῦ Χριστοῦ λόγον, ἐπὶ τὴν τελειότητα φερώμεθα 1 let us leave the beginning of the message of Christ and move forward to maturity This speaks about the basic teachings as if they were the beginning of a journey and the mature teachings as if they were the end of a journey. Alternate translation: “let us stop only discussing what we first learned and start understanding more mature teachings as well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 1 thw8 figs-metaphor μὴ πάλιν θεμέλιον καταβαλλόμενοι…πίστεως ἐπὶ Θεόν 1 Let us not lay again the foundation … of faith in God Basic teachings are spoken of as if they were a building whose construction begins by laying a foundation. Alternate translation: “Let us not repeat the basic teachings … of faith in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -292,7 +292,7 @@ HEB 6 19 vdt3 figs-doublet ἄγκυραν…ἀσφαλῆ…καὶ βεβαί HEB 6 19 d223 figs-personification ἣν…καὶ εἰσερχομένην εἰς τὸ ἐσώτερον τοῦ καταπετάσματος 1 hope that enters into the inner place behind the curtain Confidence is spoken of as if it were a person who could go into the most holy place of the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) HEB 6 19 aj2m figs-metaphor τὸ ἐσώτερον 1 the inner place This was the most holy place in the temple. It was thought to be the place where God was most intensely present among his people. In this passage, this place stands for heaven and God’s throne room. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) HEB 6 20 zgj6 κατὰ τὴν τάξιν Μελχισέδεκ 1 after the order of Melchizedek This means that Christ as a priest has things in common with Melchizedek as a priest. Alternate translation: “in the same way that Melchizedek was a priest” -HEB 7 intro y8j3 0 # Hebrews 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:17, 21, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### High priest

Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi. +HEB 7 intro y8j3 0 # Hebrews 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 7:17, 21, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### High priest

Only a high priest could offer sacrifices so that God could forgive sins, so Jesus had to be a high priest. The law of Moses commanded that the high priest be from the tribe of Levi, but Jesus was from the tribe of Judah. God made him a priest like the priest Melchizedek, who lived at the time of Abraham, before there was a tribe of Levi. HEB 7 1 mwy8 0 Connecting Statement: The writer of Hebrews continues his comparison of Jesus as priest to Melchizedek as priest. HEB 7 1 rfc9 translate-names Σαλήμ 1 Salem This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) HEB 7 1 rx36 figs-explicit Ἀβραὰμ ὑποστρέφοντι ἀπὸ τῆς κοπῆς τῶν βασιλέων 1 Abraham returning from the slaughter of the kings This is refers to when Abraham and his men went and defeated the armies of four kings in order to rescue his nephew, Lot, and his family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -349,7 +349,7 @@ HEB 7 28 u5ny ἀνθρώπους…ἔχοντας ἀσθένειαν 1 men w HEB 7 28 yez2 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος…τῆς ὁρκωμοσίας, τῆς μετὰ τὸν νόμον, Υἱόν 1 the word of the oath, which came after the law, appointed a Son The “word of the oath” represents God who made the oath. Alternate translation: “God appointed a Son by his oath, which he made after he gave the law” or “after he had given the law, God swore an oath and appointed his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 7 28 msa4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱόν 1 Son This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) HEB 7 28 fkl3 figs-activepassive τετελειωμένον 1 who has been made perfect You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “who has completely obeyed God and become mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The author finishes describing how and why Jesus is the most important high priest. Then he begins to speak about how the new covenant is better to the covenant God made with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 8:8-12, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New covenant

The author tells how Jesus has established a new covenant that is better than the covenant that God established with the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) +HEB 8 intro ks94 0 # Hebrews 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The author finishes describing how and why Jesus is the most important high priest. Then he begins to speak about how the new covenant is better to the covenant God made with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 8:8-12, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### New covenant

The author tells how Jesus has established a new covenant that is better than the covenant that God established with the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]]) HEB 8 1 nb8q 0 Connecting Statement: The writer, having shown that Christ’s priesthood is better than the earthly priesthood, shows that the earthly priesthood was a pattern of heavenly things. Christ has a superior ministry, a superior covenant. HEB 8 1 tw7l δὲ 1 Now This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows. HEB 8 1 z4dh figs-exclusive λεγομένοις 1 we are saying Even though the author uses the plural pronoun **we**, he is most likely referring only to himself. Because the writer does not include his readers here, The word **we** is exclusive. Alternate translation: “I am saying” or “I am writing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]]) @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ HEB 8 11 wne2 figs-doublet τὸν πολίτην…τὸν ἀδελφὸν 1 n HEB 8 11 q5ki figs-metonymy γνῶθι τὸν Κύριον…πάντες εἰδήσουσίν με 1 Know the Lord … will all know me **Know** here stands for acknowledge. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 8 12 cu1b figs-metonymy ταῖς ἀδικίαις αὐτῶν 1 toward their evil deeds This stands for the people who committed these evil deeds. Alternate translation: “to those who did evil deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) HEB 8 12 a1xr figs-metonymy τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν οὐ μὴ μνησθῶ ἔτι 1 their sins I will not remember any longer Here, **remember** stands for “think about.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -HEB 9 intro p8vy 0 # Hebrews 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter describes how Jesus is better than the temple and all its laws and rules. This chapter will be difficult to understand if the first five books of the Old Testament have not yet been translated.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Will

A will is a legal document that describes what will happen to a person’s property after he dies.

### Blood

In the Old Testament, God had commanded the Israelites to offer sacrifices so that he would forgive their sins. Before they could offer these sacrifices, they had to kill animals and then offer not only the animal’s body but also its blood. Shedding blood is a metaphor for killing an animal or person. Jesus offered his life, his blood, as a sacrifice when he allowed men to kill him. The writer of the Book of Hebrews is saying in this chapter that this sacrifice is better than the sacrifices of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Return of Christ

Jesus will return to finish the work that he began when he died so that God would forgive his people’s sins. He will finish saving those people who are waiting for him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### First covenant

This refers to the covenant that God made with Moses. However, before he made this covenant, God had made a covenant with Abraham. But this was the first covenant that God had made with the people of Israel. You may decide to translate “the first covenant” as “the earlier covenant.” +HEB 9 intro p8vy 0 # Hebrews 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter describes how Jesus is better than the temple and all its laws and rules. This chapter will be difficult to understand if the first five books of the Old Testament have not yet been translated.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Will

A will is a legal document that describes what will happen to a person’s property after he dies.

### Blood

In the Old Testament, God had commanded the Israelites to offer sacrifices so that he would forgive their sins. Before they could offer these sacrifices, they had to kill animals and then offer not only the animal’s body but also its blood. Shedding blood is a metaphor for killing an animal or person. Jesus offered his life, his blood, as a sacrifice when he allowed men to kill him. The writer of the Book of Hebrews is saying in this chapter that this sacrifice is better than the sacrifices of the Old Testament. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Return of Christ

Jesus will return to finish the work that he began when he died so that God would forgive his people’s sins. He will finish saving those people who are waiting for him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### First covenant

This refers to the covenant that God made with Moses. However, before he made this covenant, God had made a covenant with Abraham. But this was the first covenant that God had made with the people of Israel. You may decide to translate “the first covenant” as “the earlier covenant.” HEB 9 1 af6x 0 Connecting Statement: The writer makes clear to these Jewish believers that the laws and the tabernacle of the old covenant were only pictures of the better, new covenant. HEB 9 1 av9i οὖν 1 Now This word marks a new part of the teaching. HEB 9 1 d3vs ἡ πρώτη 1 first covenant See how you translated this in [Hebrews 8:7](../08/07.md). diff --git a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv index 55d561445a..00484f83bf 100644 --- a/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_61-1PE.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1PE front intro c1uv 0 # Introduction to 1 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of 1 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Praise for God’s salvation of the believers (1:3-2:10)
1. Christian living (2:11-4:11)
1. Encouragement to persevere when suffering (4:12-5:11)
1. Closing (5:12-14)


### Who wrote the Book of 1 Peter?

The Book of 1 Peter was written by the Apostle Peter. He wrote the letter to Gentile Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the Book of 1 Peter about?

Peter stated that he wrote this letter for the purpose of “encouraging you and testifying that this is the true grace of God” (5:12).

He encouraged Christians to continue obeying God even when they are suffering. He told them to do this because Jesus will return soon. Peter also gave instructions about Christians submitting to persons in authority.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title “1 Peter” or “First Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The First Letter from Peter” or “The First Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### How were Christians treated in Rome?

Peter probably was in Rome when he wrote this letter. He gave Rome the symbolic name of “Babylon” (5:13). It appears that when Peter wrote this letter, Romans were badly persecuting Christians.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter, except for two places: [1 Peter 1:16](../01/16.md) and [1 Peter 2:6](../02/06.md). The word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 1 Peter?

“You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth. This was for the purpose of sincere brotherly love; so love one another earnestly from the heart” (1:22). The ULT, UST, and most other modern versions read this way. Some older versions read, “You made your souls pure by obedience to the truth through the Spirit for the purpose of sincere brotherly love, so love one another earnestly from the heart.”

If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### What God reveals

When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.

### Holiness

God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Eternity

Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md)) +1PE 1 intro ql4i 0 # 1 Peter 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 1:24-25.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### What God reveals

When Jesus comes again, everyone will see how good God’s people were to have faith in Jesus. Then God’s people will see how gracious God has been to them, and all people will praise both God and his people.

### Holiness

God wants his people to be holy because God is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Eternity

Peter tells Christians to live for things that will last forever and not to live for the things of this world, which will end. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Peter writes that his readers are glad and sad at the same time ([1 Peter 1:6](../01/06.md)). He can say this because they are sad because they are suffering, but they are glad because they know that God will save them “in the last time” ([1 Peter 1:5](../01/05.md)) 1PE 1 1 g6b4 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers to whom he is writing. 1PE 1 1 u3zc figs-metaphor ἐκλεκτοῖς παρεπιδήμοις διασπορᾶς 1 to the elect foreigners of the dispersion Peter speaks of his readers as people who live away from their homes in many different countries. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 1 1 qkl8 Καππαδοκίας…Βιθυνίας 1 Cappadocia … Bithynia Along with the other places that Peter mentions, **Cappadocia** and **Bithynia** were Roman provinces located in what is now the country of Turkey. @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 1 24 hd2f figs-simile πᾶσα δόξα αὐτῆς ὡς ἄνθος χόρτου…τὸ ἄνθος ἐξέπεσεν 1 all its glory is like the flower of the grass … its flower falls off Here the word **glory** refers to beauty or goodness. Isaiah compares the things that people consider to be good or beautiful about humanity to flowers that die quickly. Alternate translation: “all their goodness is as temporary as a flower … it will fall away like a dying flower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 1 25 aba2 τὸ…ῥῆμα Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord “the message that comes from the Lord” 1PE 1 25 s11j figs-activepassive τὸ ῥῆμα τὸ εὐαγγελισθὲν 1 the word that has been proclaimed You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the gospel that we proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1PE 2 intro a121 0 # 1 Peter 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Stones

The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, the most important stone. The apostles and prophets are the foundation, the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Milk and babies

When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk,” he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 2 intro a121 0 # 1 Peter 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:6, 7, 8, and 22.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 2:10.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Stones

The Bible uses a building made of large stones as a metaphor for the church. Jesus is the cornerstone, the most important stone. The apostles and prophets are the foundation, the part of the building on which all the other stones rest. In this chapter, Christians are the stones that make up the walls of the building. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/cornerstone]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/foundation]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Milk and babies

When Peter tells his readers to “long for pure spiritual milk,” he is using the metaphor of a baby craving his mother’s milk. Peter wants Christians to crave God’s word the same way a baby craves milk. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 2 1 cch5 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues teaching his readers about holiness and obedience. 1PE 2 1 n3x5 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore The word **Therefore** here refers back to everything that Peter has said about being holy and obedient. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1PE 2 1 g65y figs-metaphor ἀποθέμενοι…πᾶσαν κακίαν, καὶ πάντα δόλον, καὶ ὑποκρίσεις, καὶ φθόνους, καὶ πάσας καταλαλιάς 1 having put aside all evil, and all deceit and hypocrisy and envy, and all slander These sinful actions are spoken of as if they were objects that people could throw away. Alternate translation: “get rid of everything that is evil, and hypocrisy, and envy, and all slander” or “stop being evil, or being deceptive, or being hypocritical, or envying, or slandering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 2 24 ep4s figs-activepassive οὗ τῷ μώλωπι ἰάθητε 1 of whose wounds you were healed You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has healed you because people bruised him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1PE 2 25 sgt9 figs-simile ἦτε…ὡς πρόβατα πλανώμενοι 1 you as sheep are being led astray Peter speaks about his readers before they believed in Christ as if they had been similar to lost sheep wandering around aimlessly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 1PE 2 25 i5lu figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα καὶ ἐπίσκοπον τῶν ψυχῶν ὑμῶν 1 the shepherd and guardian of your souls Peter speaks of Jesus as if he were a **shepherd**. Just as a shepherd protects his sheep, Jesus protects those who trust in him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 3:10-12.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Outward ornaments”

Most people want to look good so other people will like them and think they are good people. Women are especially careful to look good by wearing nice clothes and jewels. Peter is saying that what a woman thinks and says and does are more important to God than how she looks.

### Unity

Peter wanted his readers to agree with each other. More importantly, he wanted them to love each other and be patient with each other.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Peter quotes a psalm that describes God as if he were a person with eyes, ears, and a face. However, God is a spirit, so he does not have physical eyes or ears or a physical face. But he does know what people do, and he does act against wicked people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 3 intro cqf4 0 # 1 Peter 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 3:10-12.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Outward ornaments”

Most people want to look good so other people will like them and think they are good people. Women are especially careful to look good by wearing nice clothes and jewels. Peter is saying that what a woman thinks and says and does are more important to God than how she looks.

### Unity

Peter wanted his readers to agree with each other. More importantly, he wanted them to love each other and be patient with each other.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Peter quotes a psalm that describes God as if he were a person with eyes, ears, and a face. However, God is a spirit, so he does not have physical eyes or ears or a physical face. But he does know what people do, and he does act against wicked people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 3 1 p454 0 General Information: Peter begins to speak specifically to women who are wives. 1PE 3 1 cj7z ὁμοίως, γυναῖκες, ὑποτασσόμεναι τοῖς ἰδίοις ἀνδράσιν 1 In the same way, wives, submit to your own husbands Just as believers are to “obey every human authority” ([1 Peter 2:13](../02/13.md)) and servants are to “be subject” to their masters ([1 Peter 2:18](../02/18.md)), wives are to **submit** to their **husbands**. The words “obey,” “be subject,” and “submit” translate the same word. 1PE 3 1 wp5p figs-metonymy τινες ἀπειθοῦσιν τῷ λόγῳ 1 some are disobedient to the word Here, **the word** refers to the gospel message. To disobey means that they do not believe. See how you translated a similar phrase in [1 Peter 2:8](../02/08.md). Alternate translation: “some men do not believe the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 3 21 jti3 δι’ ἀναστάσεως Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 through the resurrection of Jesus Christ “because of the resurrection of Jesus Christ.” This phrase completes the thought, “This is a symbol of the baptism that saves you now.” 1PE 3 22 g4qh figs-metonymy ὅς ἐστιν ἐν δεξιᾷ Θεοῦ 1 who is at the right hand of God To be at the **right hand of God** is a symbol that God has given Jesus greatest honor and authority over all others. Alternate translation: “who is beside God in the place of honor and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 3 22 f6jq ὑποταγέντων αὐτῷ 1 after … had been subjected to him “when … had submitted to Jesus Christ” -1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly Gentiles

This passage uses the term “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. “Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry” were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Martyrdom

It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Let it” and “Let none” and “Let him” and “Let those”

Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do. +1PE 4 intro zh5n 0 # 1 Peter 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:18.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Ungodly Gentiles

This passage uses the term “Gentiles” to refer to all ungodly people who are not Jews. It does not include Gentiles who have become Christians. “Sensuality, passion, drunkenness, carousings, wild parties, and disgusting acts of idolatry” were actions that characterized or typified the ungodly Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])

### Martyrdom

It is apparent that Peter is speaking to many Christians who are experiencing great persecution and are facing death for their beliefs.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Let it” and “Let none” and “Let him” and “Let those”

Peter uses these phrases to tell his readers what he wants them to do. They are like commands because he wants his readers to obey. But it is as if he is telling one person what he wants other people to do. 1PE 4 1 b8d4 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues to teach the believers about Christian living. He begins by giving a conclusion to his thoughts from the previous chapter about Christ’s sufferings. 1PE 4 1 ess6 σαρκὶ 1 in the flesh “in his body” 1PE 4 1 p2rv figs-metaphor ὑμεῖς τὴν αὐτὴν ἔννοιαν ὁπλίσασθε 1 arm yourselves with the same intention The phrase **arm yourselves** makes readers think of soldiers who get their weapons ready for battle. It also pictures **the same intention** as a weapon or perhaps as a piece of armor. Here this metaphor means that believers should be determined in their mind to suffer as Jesus did. Alternate translation: “prepare yourselves with the same thoughts that Christ had” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -260,7 +260,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1PE 4 18 wb4v figs-doublet ὁ ἀσεβὴς καὶ ἁμαρτωλὸς 1 the ungodly and the sinner The words **ungodly** and **sinner** mean basically the same thing and emphasize the wickedness of these people. Alternate translation: “ungodly sinners” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1PE 4 19 qm3u figs-synecdoche παρατιθέσθωσαν τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 let … entrust their souls Here the word **souls** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “let … entrust themselves” or “let … entrust their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1PE 4 19 wih1 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαθοποιΐᾳ 1 in well-doing The abstract noun **well-doing** can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “while they do good” or “while they live rightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1PE 5 intro a6d9 0 # 1 Peter 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Most people in the ancient Near East would end a letter the way Peter ends this one.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Crowns

The crown that the Chief Shepherd will give is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Lion

All animals are afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God’s people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God’s people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Babylon

Babylon was the evil nation that in Old Testament times had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians he was writing to. He could have been referring to Jerusalem because the Jews were persecuting the Christians. Or he could have been referring to Rome because the Romans were persecuting the Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1PE 5 intro a6d9 0 # 1 Peter 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Most people in the ancient Near East would end a letter the way Peter ends this one.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Crowns

The crown that the Chief Shepherd will give is a reward, something that people who do something especially good receive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Lion

All animals are afraid of lions because they are fast and strong, and they eat almost every other kind of animal. They also eat people. Satan wants to make God’s people afraid, so Peter uses the simile of a lion to teach his readers that Satan can harm their bodies, but if they trust in God and obey him, they will always be God’s people, and God will care for them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Babylon

Babylon was the evil nation that in Old Testament times had destroyed Jerusalem, taken the Jews away from their homes, and ruled over them. Peter uses Babylon as a metaphor for the nation that was persecuting the Christians he was writing to. He could have been referring to Jerusalem because the Jews were persecuting the Christians. Or he could have been referring to Rome because the Romans were persecuting the Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1PE 5 1 s8fr 0 General Information: Peter speaks specifically to men who are elders. 1PE 5 1 yb3l figs-metonymy τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed This is a reference to Christ’s second coming. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1PE 5 1 a6ve figs-activepassive τῆς μελλούσης ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι δόξης 1 of the glory that is about to be revealed You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “of the glory of Christ that God will soon reveal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv index d81cd0153f..ce958bf11c 100644 --- a/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv +++ b/en_tn_62-2PE.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 2PE front intro mvk9 0 # Introduction to 2 Peter

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Peter

1. Introduction (1:1-2)
1. Reminder to live good lives because God has enabled us to (1:3-21)
1. Warning against false teachers (2:1-22)
1. Encouragement to prepare for the second coming of Jesus (3:1-17)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Peter?

The author identified himself as Simon Peter. Simon Peter was an apostle. He also wrote 1 Peter. Peter probably wrote this letter while in a prison in Rome just before he died. Peter called this letter his second letter, so we can date it after 1 Peter. He addressed the letter to the same audience as his first letter. The audience probably was Christians scattered throughout Asia Minor.

### What is the Book of 2 Peter about?

Peter wrote this letter to encourage believers to live good lives. He warned them about false teachers who were saying Jesus was taking too long to return. He told them that Jesus was not slow in returning. Instead, God was giving people time to repent so that they would be saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “2 Peter” or “Second Peter.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “The Second Letter from Peter” or “The Second Letter Peter Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people Peter spoke against?

It is possible that the people Peter spoke against were those who would become known as Gnostics. These teachers distorted the teachings of scripture for their own gain. They lived in immoral ways and taught others to do the same.

### What does it mean that God inspired Scripture?

The doctrine of scripture is a very important one. 2 Peter helps readers to understand that while each writer of scripture had his own distinct way of writing, God is the true author of scripture (1:20-21).

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Peter. Also, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Peter’s audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Peter?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “to be kept in chains of lower darkness until the judgment” (2:4). Some modern versions and older versions have, “to be kept in pits of lower darkness until the judgment.”
* “They enjoy their deceitful actions while they are feasting with you” (2:13). Some versions have, “They enjoy their actions while they are feasting with you in love feasts.”
* “Beor” (2:15). Some other versions read, “Bosor.”
* “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be revealed” (3:10). Other versions have, “The elements will be burned with fire, and the earth and the deeds in it will be burned up.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -2PE 1 intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Knowledge of God

Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])

### Living godly lives

Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The truth of Scripture

Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son. +2PE 1 intro wjw5 0 # 2 Peter 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Peter formally introduces this letter in verses 1-2. Writers often began letters in this way in the ancient Near East.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Knowledge of God

Having knowledge of God means to belong to him or to have a relationship with him. Here, “knowledge” is more than just mentally knowing about God. It is a knowledge that causes God to save a person and to give him grace and peace. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/know]])

### Living godly lives

Peter teaches that God has given believers all that they need for living godly lives. Therefore, believers should do everything they can to obey God more and more. If believers continue to do this, then they will be effective and productive through their relationship with Jesus. However, if believers do not continue living godly lives, then it is like they have forgotten what God did through Christ to save them. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### The truth of Scripture

Peter teaches that the prophecies in Scripture were not made up by men. The Holy Spirit revealed God’s message to the men who spoke them or wrote them down. Also, Peter and the other apostles did not make up the stories they told people about Jesus. They witnessed what Jesus did and heard God call Jesus his son. 2PE 1 1 n1di 0 General Information: Peter identifies himself as the writer and identifies and greets the believers he is writing to. 2PE 1 1 v381 δοῦλος καὶ ἀπόστολος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 a servant and apostle of Jesus Christ Peter speaks of being a **servant of Jesus Christ**. He also was given the position and authority of being Christ’s **apostle**. 2PE 1 1 yy7j figs-explicit τοῖς ἰσότιμον…λαχοῦσιν πίστιν 1 to those who have received the same precious faith That these people have **received** **faith** implies that God has given that faith to them. Alternate translation: “to those to whom God has given the same precious faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 1 20 wcn9 τοῦτο πρῶτον γινώσκοντες 1 Above all, you must understand “Most importantly, you must understand” 2PE 1 20 s4k2 πᾶσα προφητεία Γραφῆς ἰδίας ἐπιλύσεως οὐ γίνεται 1 every prophecy of scripture does not coms from one’s own interpretation This could mean: (1) The prophets did not make any of their prophecies on their own. (2) People must rely on the Holy Spirit to understand all the prophecies. (3) People must interpret every prophecy with the help of the entire Christian community of believers. 2PE 1 21 mh2s figs-metaphor ὑπὸ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου φερόμενοι, ἐλάλησαν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ ἄνθρωποι 1 men spoke from God being carried along by the Holy Spirit Peter speaks of the **Holy Spirit** helping the prophets to write what God wanted them to write as if the Holy Spirit was carrying them from one place to another. Alternate translation: “men spoke from God as the Holy Spirit directed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### Implicit information

There are several analogies in 2:4-8 that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +2PE 2 intro mv79 0 # 2 Peter 2 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Flesh

“Flesh” is a metaphor for a person’s sinful nature. It is not the physical part of man that is sinful. “Flesh” represents the human nature that rejects all things godly and desires what is sinful. This is the condition of all humans before they receive the Holy Spirit by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]])

### Implicit information

There are several analogies in 2:4-8 that are difficult to understand if the Old Testament has not yet been translated. Further explanation may be necessary. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2PE 2 1 us8u 0 General Information: Peter begins to warn the believers about false teachers. 2PE 2 1 l2cg ἐγένοντο…καὶ ψευδοπροφῆται ἐν τῷ λαῷ, ὡς καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσονται ψευδοδιδάσκαλοι 1 false prophets also came to the people, as false teachers will also come to you Just as **false prophets** came deceiving Israel with their words, so will false teachers come teaching lies about Christ. 2PE 2 1 tbz8 αἱρέσεις ἀπωλείας 1 destructive heresies The word **heresies** refers to opinions that are contrary to the teaching of Christ and the apostles. These heresies destroy the faith of those who believe them. @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2PE 2 21 blr5 figs-activepassive τῆς παραδοθείσης αὐτοῖς ἁγίας ἐντολῆς 1 the holy commandment delivered to them You can state this in active terms. Alternate translation: “the holy commandment that God delivered to them” or “the holy commandment that God made sure that they received” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 2PE 2 22 hqr3 συμβέβηκεν αὐτοῖς τὸ τῆς ἀληθοῦς παροιμίας 1 This has happened to them according to the true proverb “What the true proverb says has happened to them” or “This proverb describes what happened to them” 2PE 2 22 h42r writing-proverbs κύων ἐπιστρέψας ἐπὶ τὸ ἴδιον ἐξέραμα, καί, ὗς λουσαμένη, εἰς κυλισμὸν βορβόρου 1 A dog returns to its own vomit, and a washed pig to wallowing in the mud Peter uses two proverbs to illustrate how the false teachers, although they have known “the way of righteousness,” have turned back to the things that make them morally and spiritually impure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fire

People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])

### Day of the Lord

The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +2PE 3 intro c1id 0 # 2 Peter 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Fire

People often use fire to destroy things or to make something pure by burning off the dirt and worthless parts. Therefore when God punishes the wicked or purifies his people, it is often associated with fire. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])

### Day of the Lord

The exact time of the coming day of the Lord will come as a surprise to people. This is what the simile “like a thief in the night” means. Because of this, Christians are to be prepared for the coming of the Lord. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) 2PE 3 1 n92f 0 General Information: Peter begins to talk about the last days. 2PE 3 1 gc3m figs-metaphor διεγείρω ὑμῶν…τὴν εἰλικρινῆ διάνοιαν 1 I am stirring up your sincere mind Peter speaks of causing his readers to think about these things as if he were waking them from sleep. Alternate translation: “I am causing you to think pure thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2PE 3 2 gxj7 figs-activepassive τῶν προειρημένων ῥημάτων, ὑπὸ τῶν ἁγίων προφητῶν 1 the words spoken beforehand by the holy prophets You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the words that the holy prophets spoke in the past” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) diff --git a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv index e74c09293d..8931c21ca9 100644 --- a/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_63-1JN.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote 1JN front intro nl27 0 # Introduction to 1 John

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of 1 John

This is a letter that the apostle John wrote to challenge and correct false teachings that were leading followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and live in wrong ways. At that time, the letter form had distinct opening and closing sections. The main body of the letter came in between.

1. Opening of Letter (1:1-4)
1. Main Body of Letter (1:5-5:12)
* Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5-2:17)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18-2:27)
* Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28-3:10)
* Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11-18)
* Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19-24)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1-6)
* Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7-21)
* It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1-12)
1. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)

### Who wrote the book of 1 John?

The author of this letter does not give his name. However, since early Christian times, the church has widely considered the apostle John to be the author. He wrote the Gospel of John, and there are many similarities between the content of that book and this letter. If John did write this letter, he probably did so near the end of his life.

### To whom was the book of 1 John written?

The author wrote this letter to people whom he addresses as “beloved” and, figuratively, as “my little children.” This probably means believers in various churches located in the area where John was then living.

### What is the book of 1 John about?

False teachers were encouraging followers of Jesus to believe wrong things and to live in wrong ways. John wanted to challenge and correct those false teachings so that the people who received his letter would continue to believe the truth they had been taught and live in right ways. The false teachers were saying that these people were not saved; John wanted to assure them that they were saved.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “1 John” or “First John.” They may also choose a different title, such as “The First Letter from John” or “The First Letter John Wrote.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Who were the people whom John spoke against?

The false teachers John was challenging seem to have held beliefs similar to what would later become known as Gnosticism. Those false teachers believed that the physical world was evil. They thought that God would not become human, since they considered the physical body to be evil, so they denied that Jesus was God come to earth in human form. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### “sin”

In chapter 1, John says that we should not deny that we have sinned. Rather, if we confess our sin, God will forgive us. In chapter 2, John says that he is writing this letter so that the recipients will not sin, but he adds that if they do sin, Jesus will advocate on their behalf. But in chapter 3, John says that everyone who has been begotten from God and who remains in God does not commit sin and is not able to sin. And in chapter 5, John says that we should not pray for people who are sinning certain ways, although we should pray for people who are sinning in other ways. This may seem confusing and contradictory.

However, the explanation is that the people whose teachings John was writing to challenge and correct were saying that it did not matter what people did in their bodies. This was because they thought physical matter was evil, and so they thought God did not care about it. In effect, they were saying that there was no such thing as sin. So John needed to say, in chapter 1, that sin is real and that everyone has sinned. Some of the believers may have been deceived by the false teaching and committed sins, so John also needed to reassure them that if they repented and confessed their sins, God would forgive them. John says similar things in chapter 2. Then in chapter 3 he explains that the new nature that believers have as children of God is one that does not want to sin and that does not enjoy sinning. So they should recognize that those who excuse or condone sin are not truly children of God, and that as children of God themselves, they can become more and more obedient and free from sin. Finally, in chapter 5, John warns that if a person sins wantonly and continually, this likely means that they have rejected Jesus and are not influenced by the Holy Spirit. He says that in that case, it may not be effective to pray for them. But he then encourages his readers that if a person sins occasionally but feels remorse, he is influenced by the Spirit, and so the prayers of other believers will help him repent and live in a right way again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/forgive]])

### “remain”

In this letter, John often uses the word “remain” (which could also be translated as “reside” or “abide”) as a spatial metaphor. John speaks of a believer becoming more faithful to Jesus and knowing Jesus better as if the word of Jesus “remained” in the believer. He speaks of a person being spiritually joined to someone else as if that person “remained” in the other person: He writes that Christians “remain” in Christ and in God, and he says that the Father “remains” in the Son, the Son “remains” in the Father, the Son “remains” in believers, and the Holy Spirit “remains” in believers.

Translators may find it difficult to represent these ideas in their own languages if they try to use exactly the same words and expressions each time. For example, in [2:6](../02/06.md), when John speaks of a believer “remaining” in God, he intends to express the idea of that believer being spiritually unified with God. Accordingly, UST speaks of the believer being “in union with God.” To give another example, for the statement in [2:13](../02/13.md) that “the word of God remains in you,” UST says, “you continue to obey what God commands.” This shows how other expressions can be found that accurately communicate the various ideas that John is expressing through the term “remain.”

### “appear”

In several places in this letter, John uses a term that ULT usually translates as “appear.” This is actually a passive verbal form in Greek, but as is often the case with such forms in that language, it can have an active meaning. When it has an active meaning, it is important to recognize that it does not simply mean “seemed to be there,” as the word “appeared” might suggest. Rather, it means “was there.” This is illustrated well by the use of the term in another New Testament book, 2 Corinthians, in which Paul writes in [5:10](../2co/05/10.md) that “we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ.” Clearly this does not mean that we must only seem to be present there. Rather, we must actually be there.

Throughout the epistle, it is a subtle matter of interpretation to decide whether John is using the term “appear” in an active sense or in a passive sense. For example, in [1:2](../01/02.md), John applies the term twice to the “Word of life,” that is, to Jesus. But it is not clear whether he is saying that Jesus himself “appeared,” that is, he came to earth, or that he “was made apparent” (made visible), with the emphasis on the idea that God revealed Jesus to the world and in the process revealed himself to the world through Jesus. At each place where John uses this term, notes will call attention to it and discuss what it likely means in that context.

### “the world”

John also uses the term “world” in a variety of senses in this letter. It can mean the earth, something material, the people who live in the world, the people who do not honor God, or the values of the people who do not honor God. Notes will address the meaning of the term “world” in each instance where John uses it.

### “to know”

The verb “to know” is used in two different ways in this letter. Sometimes it is used about knowing a fact, as in 3:2, 3:5, and 3:19. Sometimes it means to experience and understand someone or something, as in 3:1, 3:6, 3:16, and 3:20. Sometimes John uses it in two different senses in the same sentence, as in 2:3, “in this we know that we have known him.” Your languages may have different words for these different meanings, and it would be appropriate to use them in your translation.

### Major textual issues in the text of the book of 1 John

When ancient manuscripts of the Bible differ, ULT puts the readings that scholars consider to be most accurate in its text, but it puts other possibly accurate readings in footnotes. The introductions to each chapter will discuss places where the ancient manuscripts differ in significant ways, and notes will address those places again where they occur in the book. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using the readings found in that version. If not, we recommend that you follow the readings in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Opening of the letter (1:1-4)
2. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5-10, continues through 2:17)

## Important translation issues in this chapter

Like many Greek compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes this letter begins with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the middle of [1:3](../01/03.md). The parts of this sentence are not in the order that is customary in many languages. The direct object comes first, and it is very long, made up of many different clauses. The subject and verb do not come until near the end. And in the middle, there is a long digression. So it will be a challenge to translate.

One approach that might work well in your language would be to create a verse bridge that includes all of 1:1-3. You could break up this long sentence into several smaller sentences, repeating the subject and verb for clarity. This would allow you to present the parts of the sentence in an order that might be more customary in your language and that your readers might understand better. For example:

“So that you will have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard. We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched. It has to do with the Word of life. Indeed, the life appeared, and we have seen it, and we are testifying to it. Yes, we are announcing to you the eternal life that was with the Father and that appeared to us.”

If you take this approach, another way to translate the second sentence would be, “We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, what we have heard, what we have seen with our eyes, what we have looked at and our hands have touched.”

Another approach that could also work well, and which would not require a verse bridge, would be to leave the phrases in their present order, but to divide the sentence into three parts at the verse divisions. If you do that, you could also put your translation of the phrase “regarding the Word of life” at the beginning rather than the end of [1:1](../01/01.md) and present it as a topical introduction to the letter. Otherwise, your readers might not get the sense that this is a letter until they reached [1:4](../01/04.md), where John formally states his purpose for writing.

The notes to [1:1-4](../01/01.md) provide further specific suggestions for how to translate this long opening sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [1:4](../01/04.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “so that our joy may be fulfilled.” ULT follows that reading. However, some other ancient manuscripts read “your joy” instead of “our joy.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN 1 intro ab9v 0 # 1 John 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Opening of the letter (1:1-4)
2. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (1:5-10, continues through 2:17)

## Important translation issues in this chapter

Like many Greek compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes this letter begins with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the middle of [1:3](../01/03.md). The parts of this sentence are not in the order that is customary in many languages. The direct object comes first, and it is very long, made up of many different clauses. The subject and verb do not come until near the end. And in the middle, there is a long digression. So it will be a challenge to translate.

One approach that might work well in your language would be to create a verse bridge that includes all of 1:1-3. You could break up this long sentence into several smaller sentences, repeating the subject and verb for clarity. This would allow you to present the parts of the sentence in an order that might be more customary in your language and that your readers might understand better. For example:

“So that you will have fellowship with us, we are declaring to you what we have seen and heard. We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched. It has to do with the Word of life. Indeed, the life appeared, and we have seen it, and we are testifying to it. Yes, we are announcing to you the eternal life that was with the Father and that appeared to us.”

If you take this approach, another way to translate the second sentence would be, “We are declaring to you what was from the beginning, what we have heard, what we have seen with our eyes, what we have looked at and our hands have touched.”

Another approach that could also work well, and which would not require a verse bridge, would be to leave the phrases in their present order, but to divide the sentence into three parts at the verse divisions. If you do that, you could also put your translation of the phrase “regarding the Word of life” at the beginning rather than the end of [1:1](../01/01.md) and present it as a topical introduction to the letter. Otherwise, your readers might not get the sense that this is a letter until they reached [1:4](../01/04.md), where John formally states his purpose for writing.

The notes to [1:1-4](../01/01.md) provide further specific suggestions for how to translate this long opening sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [1:4](../01/04.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts read “so that our joy may be fulfilled.” ULT follows that reading. However, some other ancient manuscripts read “your joy” instead of “our joy.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 1 1 j363 writing-pronouns ὃ ἦν ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς, ὃ ἀκηκόαμεν, ὃ ἑωράκαμεν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς ἡμῶν, ὃ ἐθεασάμεθα, καὶ αἱ χεῖρες ἡμῶν ἐψηλάφησαν 1 What was from the beginning, which we have heard, which we have seen with our eyes, which we have looked at and our hands have touched See the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter for how to translate the long sentence in [1:1-3](../01/01.md). If you follow the suggestion to translate the phrase “regarding the Word of life” as a topical introduction to this letter, you will already have indicated that the four clauses in this verse refer to a person, Jesus. You could therefore introduce them with the personal pronouns “who” and “whom.” Alternate translation: “He is the one who has existed from all eternity, whom we heard speak, whom we saw with our own eyes, and whom we looked at and touched with our own hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 1 1 j364 figs-idiom ἀπ’ ἀρχῆς 1 from the beginning John uses the phrase **from the beginning** in various ways in this letter. Here it refers to the eternal existence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “from all eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 1 1 jd7p figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν…ἑωράκαμεν…ἡμῶν…ἐθεασάμεθα…ἡμῶν 1 we have heard … we have seen … our … we have looked at … our In most cases in this letter, the first-person plural pronouns are inclusive, and so if your language marks that distinction, use the inclusive form in your translation. John is speaking of what both he and the recipients know, or of things that are true of both him and the recipients. However, in a few cases, the first-person pronouns are exclusive, since John is telling the recipients what he and his fellow apostles saw and heard from Jesus. These notes will identify all such places, and in them you should use the exclusive forms, if your language marks that distinction. Here the pronouns **we** and **our** are exclusive, since John is speaking on behalf of himself and the other eyewitnesses to the earthly life of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 1 10 hii2 figs-explicit ψεύστην ποιοῦμεν αὐτὸν 1 we make him a liar Be sure that it is clear in your translation that God would not actually be a **liar** in this case. Rather, a person who claimed to be without sin would be calling God a liar, since God has said that everyone is a sinner. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “that is the same as calling God a liar, because God has said that we have all sinned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1JN 1 10 j042 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 his word is not in us John is using the term **word** figuratively to mean what God has said by using words. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 1 10 m3p1 figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἡμῖν 1 his word is not in us As he did about the “truth” in [1:8](../01/08.md), John is speaking figuratively of God’s **word** as if it were an object that could be inside believers. Alternate translation: “we do not believe what God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 2 intro zjj9 0 # 1 John 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (2:1-17, continuing from 1:5)
2. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18-2:27)
3. Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28-29, continues through 3:10)

In order to show that John is writing something like poetry in in [2:12-14](../02/12.md), some translations set the statements in those verses farther to the right than the rest of the text, and they begin a new line at the start of each statement.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Antichrist

In [2:18](../02/18.md) and [2:22](../02/22.md), John writes both about a specific person called the Antichrist and about many people who will be “antichrists.” The word “antichrist” means “opposed to Christ.” The Antichrist is a person who will come just before the return of Jesus and imitate Jesus’ work, but he will do that for evil purposes. Before that person comes, there will be many other people who work against Christ. They too are called “antichrists,” but as a description rather than as a name. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts read “you all know,” and that is the reading that ULT follows. However, other ancient manuscripts read “you know all things.” It seems more likely, based on everything else in the letter, that “you all know” is the correct original reading, since John is countering the claim of false teachers to know more than other believers. The reading “you know all things” seems to have arisen because copyists felt a need to have an object for the verb “know.” Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN 2 intro zjj9 0 # 1 John 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Genuine believers obey God and love one another (2:1-17, continuing from 1:5)
2. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Messiah (2:18-2:27)
3. Genuine children of God do not sin (2:28-29, continues through 3:10)

In order to show that John is writing something like poetry in in [2:12-14](../02/12.md), some translations set the statements in those verses farther to the right than the rest of the text, and they begin a new line at the start of each statement.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Antichrist

In [2:18](../02/18.md) and [2:22](../02/22.md), John writes both about a specific person called the Antichrist and about many people who will be “antichrists.” The word “antichrist” means “opposed to Christ.” The Antichrist is a person who will come just before the return of Jesus and imitate Jesus’ work, but he will do that for evil purposes. Before that person comes, there will be many other people who work against Christ. They too are called “antichrists,” but as a description rather than as a name. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/antichrist]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [2:20](../02/20.md), some ancient manuscripts read “you all know,” and that is the reading that ULT follows. However, other ancient manuscripts read “you know all things.” It seems more likely, based on everything else in the letter, that “you all know” is the correct original reading, since John is countering the claim of false teachers to know more than other believers. The reading “you know all things” seems to have arisen because copyists felt a need to have an object for the verb “know.” Nevertheless, if a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 2 1 j043 τεκνία μου 1 My little children Here and in several other places in the book, John uses the diminutive form of the word **children** as an affectionate form of address. Alternate translation: “My dear children” 1JN 2 1 v57g figs-metaphor τεκνία μου 1 My little children John is also using the word **children** figuratively to describe the believers to whom he is writing. They are under his spiritual care, and so he regards them as if they were his own children. You could translate this in a non-figurative way, or you could represent the metaphor as a simile, as UST does. Alternate translation: “You dear believers who are under my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 2 1 p49e ταῦτα γράφω 1 I am writing these things Alternate translation: “I am writing this letter” @@ -263,7 +263,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 2 29 j148 figs-abstractnouns πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην 1 everyone who does righteousness If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **righteousness** with an adjective such as “right.” Alternate translation: “everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1JN 2 29 u6er figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 2 29 j149 figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐξ αὐτοῦ γεγέννηται 1 everyone who does righteousness has been begotten from him Since believers have not literally **been begotten** by God, John means this figuratively. He says in [4:9](../04/09.md) that Jesus is the “only-begotten” of God, since God is the actual Father of Jesus in a way that he is not the actual father of believers. Alternate translation: “God is the spiritual father of everyone who does what is right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 3 intro d8r2 0 # 1 John 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Genuine children of God do not sin (3:1-10, continuing from 2:28)
2. Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11-18)
3. Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19-24)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “children of God”

People are sometimes described as “children of God” because God created them. However, John uses this expression in a different sense in this chapter. He uses it to describe people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. God indeed created all people, but people can only become children of God in this sense by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “the one who keeps his commandments remains in him, and he in him” (3:24)

This does not mean that keeping our salvation is conditional on doing certain works. Rather, John is describing the results of keeping the commandments that he describes in [3:32](../03/32.md). Those commandments are to believe in Jesus and to love one another. John is saying that the person who believes in Jesus and loves others shows that he has a close relationship with God, and that he will continue to have that close relationship because of this obedience. Christians around the world hold different beliefs about whether people who have been saved can lose their salvation. That is not what John is addressing here, and translators should be careful not to let how they understand that issue affect how they translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [3:1](../03/01.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts include the words “and we are.” That is the reading that ULT follows. However, some other ancient manuscripts do not include these words, and so some Bibles do not have them. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN 3 intro d8r2 0 # 1 John 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Genuine children of God do not sin (3:1-10, continuing from 2:28)
2. Genuine believers help one another sacrificially (3:11-18)
3. Genuine believers have confidence in prayer (3:19-24)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “children of God”

People are sometimes described as “children of God” because God created them. However, John uses this expression in a different sense in this chapter. He uses it to describe people who have entered into a father-child relationship with God by putting their faith and trust in Jesus. God indeed created all people, but people can only become children of God in this sense by believing in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “the one who keeps his commandments remains in him, and he in him” (3:24)

This does not mean that keeping our salvation is conditional on doing certain works. Rather, John is describing the results of keeping the commandments that he describes in [3:32](../03/32.md). Those commandments are to believe in Jesus and to love one another. John is saying that the person who believes in Jesus and loves others shows that he has a close relationship with God, and that he will continue to have that close relationship because of this obedience. Christians around the world hold different beliefs about whether people who have been saved can lose their salvation. That is not what John is addressing here, and translators should be careful not to let how they understand that issue affect how they translate this passage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [3:1](../03/01.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts include the words “and we are.” That is the reading that ULT follows. However, some other ancient manuscripts do not include these words, and so some Bibles do not have them. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 3 1 gl8n figs-metaphor ἴδετε 1 See John is using the term **See** figuratively. Alternate translation: “Consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 1 j150 ποταπὴν ἀγάπην δέδωκεν ἡμῖν ὁ Πατὴρ 1 what kind of love the Father has given to us Alternate translation: “how greatly the Father has loved us” 1JN 3 1 j151 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -394,7 +394,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 3 24 j230 figs-metaphor καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν αὐτῷ 1 and he in him John is speaking figuratively as if God could be inside of believers. Alternate translation: “and God continues to have a close relationship with that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1JN 3 24 j231 figs-idiom ἐν τούτῳ γινώσκομεν ὅτι 1 in this we know that This is an idiomatic expression that John uses many times in this letter. Alternate translation: “this is how we know that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1JN 3 24 j232 figs-metaphor μένει ἐν ἡμῖν 1 he remains in us See the discussion of the term “remain” in Part 3 of the Introduction to 1 John. In this instance, it seems to mean the same thing as it does earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “he continues to have a close relationship with us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 4 intro l3qa 0 # 1 John 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1-6)
2. Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7-21)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Spirit” and “spirit”

John uses the word “spirit” in different ways in this chapter.

Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to a supernatural being.

Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to the character of something. The expressions “the spirit of the antichrist,” “the spirit of truth,” and “the spirit of error” refer to what is typical of them.

When the word is written with a capital letter, as in the expressions “the Spirit of God” and “his Spirit,” it refers to the Holy Spirit.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Loving God

If people love God, they should show it in the way they live and the way they treat other people. Doing this may assure us that God has saved us and that we belong to him. But loving others does not save us. Be sure that this is clear in your translation. John says in 4:7 that “everyone who loves is begotten from God and knows God.” As the notes explain, this means that God is the spiritual father of everyone who loves, and everyone who loves is in a close relationship with God. But that love is a sign that they belong to God because of what Jesus did for them on the cross, as John says in 4:10. They were saved by what Jesus did, not because they themselves loved others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [4:3](../04/03.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some other ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus Christ having come in the flesh.” (Some of these manuscripts say “Jesus” or “the Lord Jesus” instead of “Jesus Christ.”) If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN 4 intro l3qa 0 # 1 John 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus became human (4:1-6)
2. Genuine believers love one another as God has loved them (4:7-21)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Spirit” and “spirit”

John uses the word “spirit” in different ways in this chapter.

Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to a supernatural being.

Sometimes the word “spirit” refers to the character of something. The expressions “the spirit of the antichrist,” “the spirit of truth,” and “the spirit of error” refer to what is typical of them.

When the word is written with a capital letter, as in the expressions “the Spirit of God” and “his Spirit,” it refers to the Holy Spirit.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Loving God

If people love God, they should show it in the way they live and the way they treat other people. Doing this may assure us that God has saved us and that we belong to him. But loving others does not save us. Be sure that this is clear in your translation. John says in 4:7 that “everyone who loves is begotten from God and knows God.” As the notes explain, this means that God is the spiritual father of everyone who loves, and everyone who loves is in a close relationship with God. But that love is a sign that they belong to God because of what Jesus did for them on the cross, as John says in 4:10. They were saved by what Jesus did, not because they themselves loved others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [4:3](../04/03.md), the most accurate ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some other ancient manuscripts say “acknowledge Jesus Christ having come in the flesh.” (Some of these manuscripts say “Jesus” or “the Lord Jesus” instead of “Jesus Christ.”) If a translation of the Bible already exists in your region, consider using whichever reading is found in that version. If a translation does not already exist, we recommend that you follow the reading in the ULT text. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 4 1 h1lv figs-nominaladj ἀγαπητοί 1 Beloved See how you translated this in [2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “You people whom I love” or “Dear friends” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1JN 4 1 zm7f figs-metonymy μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε, ἀλλὰ δοκιμάζετε τὰ πνεύματα 1 do not believe every spirit, but test the spirits John is speaking figuratively of a prophet by association with the **spirit** that would inspire a prophet to speak. Alternate translation: “do not believe every prophet; instead, consider carefully what prophets say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1JN 4 1 j234 figs-idiom εἰ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ ἐστιν 1 whether they are from God The expression **from God** is an idiom. John uses it in various ways in this letter. Alternate translation: “in order to determine whether God has sent them” or “in order to determine whether God is inspiring them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -505,7 +505,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1JN 4 21 j297 ταύτην τὴν ἐντολὴν ἔχομεν ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 we have this commandment from him Alternate translation: “this is what God has commanded us” 1JN 4 21 j298 writing-pronouns ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 from him The pronoun **him** refers to God. Alternate translation: “from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) 1JN 4 21 j299 figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 his brother See how you translated this in [2:9](../02/09.md). Alternate translation: “each fellow believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1JN 5 intro bxm4 0 # 1 John 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1-12)
2. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “a sin towards death”

It is not entirely clear what John means by this phrase. The word “death” could refer either to physical death or to spiritual death, that is, to eternal separation from God. See the further discussion in the notes to [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])

### “the whole world lies in the power of the evil one”

The phrase “the evil one” refers to Satan. God has allowed him to rule the world, but, ultimately, God is in control over everything. God keeps his children safe from the evil one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [5:7-8](../05/07.md), all ancient manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify, the Spirit and the water and the blood, and the three are unto the one.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some much later manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify in heaven: the Father, the Word, and the Holy Spirit, and these three are one; and there are three who testify on earth: the Spirit and the water and the blood, and these three are unto the one.” In this case, translators are advised to translate this as the ULT text does, since there is wide agreement that it follows the accurate reading. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that have the longer reading, you can include it, but you should put it inside square brackets \[ \] to indicate that it was most likely not in the original version of 1 John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1JN 5 intro bxm4 0 # 1 John 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. It is false teaching to deny that Jesus is the Son of God (5:1-12)
2. Closing of Letter (5:13-21)

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “a sin towards death”

It is not entirely clear what John means by this phrase. The word “death” could refer either to physical death or to spiritual death, that is, to eternal separation from God. See the further discussion in the notes to [5:16](../05/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/death]])

### “the whole world lies in the power of the evil one”

The phrase “the evil one” refers to Satan. God has allowed him to rule the world, but, ultimately, God is in control over everything. God keeps his children safe from the evil one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/satan]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

In [5:7-8](../05/07.md), all ancient manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify, the Spirit and the water and the blood, and the three are unto the one.” That is the reading that ULT follows. Some much later manuscripts say: “For there are three who testify in heaven: the Father, the Word, and the Holy Spirit, and these three are one; and there are three who testify on earth: the Spirit and the water and the blood, and these three are unto the one.” In this case, translators are advised to translate this as the ULT text does, since there is wide agreement that it follows the accurate reading. However, if there are older versions of the Bible in your region that have the longer reading, you can include it, but you should put it inside square brackets \[ \] to indicate that it was most likely not in the original version of 1 John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 1JN 5 1 j300 ὁ Χριστὸς 1 the Christ **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” Alternate translation: “the Messiah” 1JN 5 1 j301 figs-activepassive πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Χριστὸς, ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται 1 Everyone who believes that Jesus is the Christ has been begotten from God See how you translated the similar expression in [2:29](../02/29.md). Alternate translation: “God is the father of everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1JN 5 1 h8if figs-metaphor πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Χριστὸς, ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ γεγέννηται 1 Everyone who believes that Jesus is the Christ has been begotten from God See whether in [2:29](../02/29.md) you decided to explain this metaphor. Alternate translation: “God is the spiritual father of everyone who believes that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) diff --git a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv index a91e28d4a0..5235e83171 100644 --- a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv +++ b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote REV front intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Revelation

1. Opening (1:1-20)
1. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)
1. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)
1. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)
1. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)
1. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)
1. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)
1. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)
1. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)
1. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)
1. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)

### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?

The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.

### What is the Book of Revelation about?

John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?

John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### Are the events of Revelation past or future?

Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.

Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.

### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?

No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?

One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?

The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)
* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### Periods of time

John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?

For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”
* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”
* “so that a third of it [the earth] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.
* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”
* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).
* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”
* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”
* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”
* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -REV 1 intro u1e2 0 # Revelation 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven churches

John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.

### White

The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being “white.” This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### “Him who is, and who was, and who is to come”

God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Blood

Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus “has released us from our sins by his blood.” John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “He is coming with the clouds”

Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be “with the clouds.” It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or “with the clouds” in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.

### “One like a son of man”

This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words “son of man” using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the “Son of Man.”

### “The angels of the seven churches”

The word “angels” here can also mean “messengers.” This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word “angel” (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word. +REV 1 intro u1e2 0 # Revelation 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven churches

John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.

### White

The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being “white.” This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### “Him who is, and who was, and who is to come”

God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Blood

Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus “has released us from our sins by his blood.” John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “He is coming with the clouds”

Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be “with the clouds.” It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or “with the clouds” in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.

### “One like a son of man”

This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words “son of man” using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the “Son of Man.”

### “The angels of the seven churches”

The word “angels” here can also mean “messengers.” This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word “angel” (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word. REV 1 1 kv41 0 General Information: This is an introduction to the book of Revelation. It explains that it is a revelation from Jesus Christ and it gives a blessing to those who read it. REV 1 1 ik5v τοῖς δούλοις αὐτοῦ 1 his servants This refers to people who believe in Christ. REV 1 1 x8bu ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι ἐν τάχει 1 what must soon take place “the events that must happen soon” @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ REV 1 20 d6ez writing-symlanguage ἀστέρων 1 stars These stars are symbol REV 1 20 fl5d writing-symlanguage λυχνίας 1 lampstands The lampstands are symbols that represent the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 1 20 eek9 ἄγγελοι τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 the angels of the seven churches Here, **angels** could mean: (1) This refers to heavenly angels who protect the seven churches. (2) This refers to human messengers to the seven churches, either messengers who went from John to the churches or the leaders of those churches. REV 1 20 e25n ἑπτὰ ἐκκλησιῶν 1 seven churches This refers to seven churches that actually existed in Asia Minor at that time. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). -REV 2 intro zps2 0 # Revelation 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Poverty and wealth

The Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### “The devil is about to”

People were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel

Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”

The writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The angel of the church”

The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

### “The words of the one who”

The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3. +REV 2 intro zps2 0 # Revelation 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 27.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Poverty and wealth

The Christians in Smyrna were poor because they did not have much money. But they were rich spiritually because God would reward them for their suffering. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])

### “The devil is about to”

People were about to take some of the Christians in Smyrna and throw them into prison and even kill some of them ([Revelation 2:10](../../rev/02/10.md)). John does not say who these people were. But he does speak of them harming the Christians as if Satan himself were harming them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

### Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel

Balaam, Balak, and Jezebel were people who lived long before Jesus was born. They all tried to harm the Israelites either by cursing them or by making them want to stop obeying God.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”

The writer knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The angel of the church”

The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

### “The words of the one who”

The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3. REV 2 1 mn8x 0 General Information: This is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Ephesus. REV 2 1 kq5r τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 the angel Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angels who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) REV 2 1 i92a writing-symlanguage ἀστέρας 1 stars These stars are symbols. They represent the seven angels of the seven churches. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) @@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ REV 2 28 c1zc καὶ δώσω αὐτῷ 1 I will also give him Here, **him** REV 2 28 g5iy writing-symlanguage τὸν ἀστέρα τὸν πρωϊνόν 1 morning star This is a bright star that sometimes appears early in the morning just before dawn. It was a symbol of victory. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) REV 2 29 ilk8 figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) REV 2 29 ikm8 figs-123person ὁ…ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one … hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -REV 3 intro q1l9 0 # Revelation 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

### Seven stars

These stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking

Jesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”

The speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The angel of the church”

The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

### “The words of the one who”

The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3. +REV 3 intro q1l9 0 # Revelation 3 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapters 2 and 3 together are usually called the “seven letters to the seven churches.” You may wish to set each letter apart. The reader can then easily see that they are separate letters.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verse 7.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

### Seven stars

These stars are the seven stars of [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

## Important metaphors in this chapter

### Look, I am standing at the door and am knocking

Jesus speaks of his desire to have the Christians in Laodicea obey him as if he were a man asking people in a house to allow him to enter and eat with them ([Revelation 3:20](../../rev/03/20.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Let the one who has an ear, hear what the Spirit is saying to the churches”

The speaker knew that almost all of his readers had physical ears. The ear here is a metonym for hearing what God says and desiring to obey him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “The angel of the church”

The word **angel** here can also mean “messenger.” This might refer to the messenger or leader of the church. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../../rev/01/20.md).

### “The words of the one who”

The verses with these words can be difficult to translate. They do not make complete sentences. You may need to add “These are” to the beginning of these verses. Also, Jesus used these words to speak of himself as if he were speaking of another person. Your language may not allow people to speak of themselves as if they were speaking of other people. Jesus began speaking in [Revelation 1:17](../../rev/01/17.md). He continues to speak through the end of Chapter 3. REV 3 1 k6b7 0 General Information: This is the beginning of the Son of Man’s message to the angel of the church in Sardis. REV 3 1 u1zs τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 the angel Here, **angel** could mean: (1) This refers to a heavenly angel who protects this church. (2) This refers to a human messenger to the church, either a messenger who went from John to the church or the leader of the churches. See how you translated “angel” in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md). REV 3 1 q7n9 translate-names Σάρδεσιν 1 Sardis This is the name of a city in the western part of Asia that today is modern Turkey. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ REV 3 21 mn2c figs-metonymy καθίσαι μετ’ ἐμοῦ ἐν τῷ θρ REV 3 21 un17 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 my Father This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) REV 3 22 m13x figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said is important and may take some effort to understand and put into practice. The phrase **has an ear** here is a metonym for the willingness to understand and obey. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “Let the one who is willing to listen, listen to” or “The one who is willing to understand, let him understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) REV 3 22 mjv6 figs-123person ὁ…ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one … hear Since Jesus is speaking directly to his audience, you may prefer to use the second person here. See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). Alternate translation: “If you are willing to listen, listen to” or “If you are willing to understand, then understand and obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -REV 4 intro cl9f 0 # Revelation 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.

John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald

These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John’s day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.

### Twenty-four elders

Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

### Giving glory to God

God’s glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Difficult images

Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]]) +REV 4 intro cl9f 0 # Revelation 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.

John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald

These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John’s day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.

### Twenty-four elders

Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

### Giving glory to God

God’s glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Difficult images

Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]]) REV 4 1 ws2q 0 General Information: John begins to describe his vision of the throne of God. REV 4 1 vh4i μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things “After I had just seen these things” ([Revelation 2:1-3:22](../02/01.md)) REV 4 1 z8r8 figs-metaphor θύρα ἠνεῳγμένη ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ 1 an open door in heaven This expression stands for the ability that God gave John to see into heaven, at least by means of a vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -251,7 +251,7 @@ REV 4 10 sly8 translate-symaction βαλοῦσιν τοὺς στεφάνους REV 4 10 wvf9 βαλοῦσιν 1 lay This could mean: (1) This refers to placing something. (2) This refers to throwing down forcibly, as of something worthless ([Revelation 2:22](../02/22.md)). The reader should understand that the elders are acting respectfully. REV 4 11 idj1 ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 our Lord and our God “our Lord and God.” This is one person, the one who was sitting on the throne. REV 4 11 q91l figs-metonymy λαβεῖν τὴν δόξαν καὶ τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν 1 to receive the glory and the honor and the power These are things that God always has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. Alternate translation: “to be praised for your glory, honor, and power” or “for everyone to praise you because you are glorious, honorable, and powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 5 intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 05 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sealed scroll

Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])

### Twenty-four elders

Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Christian prayers

The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.

### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

The “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +REV 5 intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 5 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sealed scroll

Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])

### Twenty-four elders

Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Christian prayers

The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.

### Seven spirits of God

These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../../rev/01/04.md).

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphors

The “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 5 1 txr5 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe what he saw in his vision of the throne of God. REV 5 1 w3yi καὶ εἶδον 1 Then I saw “After I saw those things, I saw” REV 5 1 u3br τοῦ καθημένου ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου 1 the one who was seated on the throne This is the same “one” as in [Revelation 4:2-3](../04/02.md). @@ -285,7 +285,7 @@ REV 5 12 gnv1 ἄξιόν ἐστιν τὸ Ἀρνίον τὸ ἐσφαγμέ REV 5 12 mt28 figs-metonymy λαβεῖν τὴν δύναμιν, καὶ πλοῦτον, καὶ σοφίαν, καὶ ἰσχὺν, καὶ τιμὴν, καὶ δόξαν, καὶ εὐλογίαν 1 to receive power, wealth, wisdom, strength, honor, glory, and praise These are all things that the Lamb has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. This can be restated to remove the abstract nouns. See how you translated a similar sentence in [Revelation 4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “for everyone to honor, glorify, and praise him because he is powerful, wealthy, wise, and strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) REV 5 13 sad6 figs-merism ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὑποκάτω τῆς γῆς 1 in heaven and on the earth and under the earth This means everywhere: the place where God and the angels live, the place where people and animals live, and the place where those who have died are. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) REV 5 13 t3zy τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῷ θρόνῳ καὶ τῷ Ἀρνίῳ 1 To the one who sits on the throne and to the Lamb “May he who sits on the throne and the Lamb have” -REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 06 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven Seals

Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### The Four Horsemen

As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb

This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Similes

In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 6 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven Seals

Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### The Four Horsemen

As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb

This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Similes

In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) REV 6 1 i392 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe the events that happened before the throne of God. The Lamb begins to open the seals on the scroll. REV 6 1 be7p ἔρχου! 1 Come! This is a command to one person, apparently the rider of the white horse who is spoken of in verse 2. REV 6 2 t2qg figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτῷ στέφανος 1 he was given a crown This kind of crown was a likeness of wreaths of olive branches or laurel leaves, probably hammered out in gold. Examples actually made of leaves were given to victorious athletes to wear on their heads. You can translate this with an active verb. Alternate translation: “he received a crown” or “God gave him a crown (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -330,7 +330,7 @@ REV 6 17 bd8v figs-metonymy ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ μεγάλη τῆς REV 6 17 i7t4 figs-metaphor ἦλθεν 1 has come Existing now is spoken of as having come. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 6 17 cq9e ὀργῆς αὐτῶν 1 their wrath “Their” refers to the one on the throne and the Lamb. REV 6 17 r1ta figs-metonymy τίς δύναται σταθῆναι? 1 Who is able to stand? Surviving, or staying alive, is spoken of as standing. This question is used to express their great sadness and fear that no one will be able to survive when God punishes them. Alternate translation: “No one can survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.

Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Worship

God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb

This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.

Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Worship

God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The Lamb

This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) REV 7 1 b1yl 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of 144,000 servants of God who become marked with seals. Their marking takes place after the Lamb opens the sixth seal and before he opens the seventh seal. REV 7 1 id3y τὰς τέσσαρας γωνίας τῆς γῆς 1 the four corners of the earth The earth is spoken of as if it were flat and square like a sheet of paper. The phrase **the four corners** refers to the north, south, east, and west. REV 7 2 sgq7 figs-metonymy σφραγῖδα Θεοῦ ζῶντος 1 the seal of the living God The word **seal** here refers to a tool that is used to press a mark onto a wax seal. In this case the tool would be used to put a mark on God’s people. Alternate translation: “the marker” or “stamp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -366,7 +366,7 @@ REV 7 17 b5rp τὸ Ἀρνίον τὸ ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ θρόνο REV 7 17 bi5i figs-metaphor ὅτι τὸ Ἀρνίον…ποιμανεῖ αὐτούς 1 For the Lamb … will be their shepherd The elder speaks of the Lamb’s care for his people as if it were a shepherd’s care for his sheep. Alternate translation: “For the Lamb … will be like a shepherd to them” or “For the Lamb … will care for them as a shepherd cares for his sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 7 17 m6m8 figs-metaphor ὁδηγήσει αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ ζωῆς πηγὰς ὑδάτων 1 he will guide them to springs of living water The elder speaks of what gives life as if it were springs of fresh water. Alternate translation: “he will guide them like a shepherd guiding his sheep to fresh water” or “he will guide them to life like a shepherd guiding his sheep to living water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) REV 7 17 g3d2 figs-metonymy ἐξαλείψει ὁ Θεὸς πᾶν δάκρυον ἐκ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 God will wipe away every tear from their eyes **Tears** here represent sadness. Alternate translation: “God will wipe away their sadness, like wiping away tears” or “God will cause them to not be sad anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -REV 8 intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 08 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven seals and seven trumpets

This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Passive voice

John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Similes

In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +REV 8 intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 8 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Seven seals and seven trumpets

This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Passive voice

John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

### Similes

In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) REV 8 1 d652 0 Connecting Statement: The Lamb opens the seventh seal. REV 8 1 mh2b translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἑβδόμην 1 the seventh seal This is the last of the seven seals on the scroll. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “the final seal” or “seal number seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) REV 8 2 fri9 figs-activepassive ἐδόθησαν αὐτοῖς ἑπτὰ σάλπιγγες 1 seven trumpets were given to them They were each given one trumpet. You can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God gave them seven trumpets. (2) The Lamb gave them seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ REV 8 12 z936 figs-metaphor ἐπλήγη τὸ τρίτον τοῦ ἡλίου REV 8 12 ukh6 σκοτισθῇ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῶν 1 a third of them turned dark This could mean: (1) One third of the time, they were dark. (2) One third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark. REV 8 12 t1ag ἡ ἡμέρα μὴ φάνῃ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς, καὶ ἡ νὺξ ὁμοίως 1 a third of the day and a third of the night had no light “there was no light during one third of the day and one third of the night” or “they did not shine during one third of the day and one third of the night” REV 8 13 x375 figs-activepassive ἐκ τῶν λοιπῶν φωνῶν τῆς σάλπιγγος…σαλπίζειν 1 because of the remaining trumpet … angels You can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “because the three angels who have not yet sounded their trumpets are about to sound them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 09 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Woe

John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Animal imagery

This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.

### Bottomless pit

This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])

### Abaddon and Apollyon

“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### Repentance

Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile

John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 9 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### Woe

John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Animal imagery

This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.

### Bottomless pit

This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])

### Abaddon and Apollyon

“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])

### Repentance

Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile

John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) REV 9 1 d26c 0 Connecting Statement: The fifth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet. REV 9 1 jim6 εἶδον ἀστέρα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεπτωκότα 1 I saw a star from heaven that had fallen John saw the star after it had fallen. He did not watch if fall. REV 9 1 v12j ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 the key to the shaft of the bottomless pit “the key that unlocks the shaft of the bottomless pit”